Intermec Technologies 2610CF 2610CF User Manual legal

Intermec Technologies Corporation 2610CF legal

UserManual.wiki >

Intermec Technologies >

2610CF User Manual >

700C User Manual 1 of 3

700 Series Color Mobile ComputerUser's Manual

iv 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Contentsv700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualContentsBefore You Begin xix.............................................................Safety Summary xix.......................................................Donotrepairoradjustalone xix.......................................First aid xix.......................................................Resuscitation xix...................................................Energized equipment xix.............................................Safety Icons xx...........................................................Global Services and Support xxi..............................................Warranty Information xxi............................................Web Support xxi...................................................Telephone Support xxi...............................................WhoShouldReadthisManual? xxii..........................................Related Documents xxii....................................................Introduction1...............................................................Ambient Light Sensor 2..........................................................Audio System 3.................................................................Speaker 3...............................................................Microphone 4...........................................................External Headset Jack 4....................................................Battery 5......................................................................Beeper 7......................................................................Enable the Beeper 7.......................................................Disable the Scanner Mute 8.................................................Select a Beeper Volume 9...................................................Disable the Beeper 10.....................................................Keypad 11.....................................................................Backlight for Keypad 11....................................................Key Sequences 12.........................................................[Gold] or [Gold/White] Plane Keys 12..................................Alpha (Blue) Plane Keys 14...........................................Modem Support 16..............................................................PSM Build Version 16...........................................................Resetting Your 700 Color Computer 17..............................................Software Build Version 18.........................................................1

Contentsvi 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualStorage Media 19...............................................................CompactFlash Cards 19....................................................Secure Digital Cards 19....................................................Vibrator 20....................................................................Wireless Network Support 21......................................................Accessories 22..................................................................What’s New 22.................................................................Windows Mobile 200323....................................................Software Builds 24..............................................................Where to Find Information 25.....................................................Basic Skills 26..................................................................Today Screen 26..........................................................Programs 27.............................................................Navigation Bar and Command Bar 28.........................................Pop-up Menus 29........................................................Notifications 29..........................................................Entering Information 30...................................................Typing With the Onscreen Keyboard 31................................Using Block Recognizer 32...........................................Using Letter Recognizer 33...........................................Using Transcriber 33................................................Selecting Typed Text 33.............................................Writing on the Screen 34...................................................Selecting the Writing 34.............................................Converting Writing to Text 35........................................Drawing on the Screen 37..................................................Creating a Drawing 37..............................................Selecting a Drawing 37..............................................Recording a Message 38....................................................Creating a Recording 38.............................................Using My Text 39........................................................Finding and Organizing Information 40.......................................Customizing Your 700 Color Computer 41.....................................Adjusting Settings 41...............................................Adding or Removing Programs 41.....................................Microsoft ActiveSync 44..........................................................2

Contentsvii700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMicrosoft Pocket Outlook 46......................................................Calendar: Scheduling Appointments and Meetings 46.............................Synchronizing Calendar 47...........................................Why Use Categories in the Calendar? 47................................What’s an All Day Event? 48.........................................What’s a Recurrence Pattern? 49.......................................Viewing Appointments 49............................................Creating or Changing an Appointment 51...............................Creating an All Day Event 52.........................................Setting a Reminder for an Appointment 53...............................Adding a Note to an Appointment 54...................................Making an Appointment Recurring 55..................................Assigning an Appointment to a Category 56..............................Sending a Meeting Request 57........................................Finding an Appointment 58..........................................Deleting an Appointment 58..........................................Changing Calendar Options 59.......................................Contacts: Tracking Friends and Colleagues 60...................................Creating a Contact 61...............................................Synchronizing Contacts 61...........................................Viewing Contacts 62................................................Creating or Changing a Contact 63....................................Adding a Note to a Contact 64........................................Assigning a Contact to a Category 65...................................Copying a Contact 65...............................................Sending a Message to a Contact 66.....................................Finding a Contact 67...............................................Deleting a Contact 67...............................................Adding a Contact to Speed Dial 68.....................................Changing Contacts Options 68........................................Tasks: Keeping a To Do List 69..............................................Creating a Task 70.................................................Synchronizing Tasks 70..............................................Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas 71......................................Creating a Note 71.................................................Synchronizing Notes 72.............................................Inbox: Sending and Receiving E-mail Messages 73...............................Synchronizing E-mail Messages 73.....................................Managing E-mail Messages and Folders 74...............................Connecting to a Mail Server 75........................................Composing and Sending Messages 77...................................Companion Programs 78.........................................................Pocket Word 78..........................................................Creating a Document 78.............................................Typing Mode 79...................................................Writing Mode 80..................................................Recording Mode 80................................................Drawing Mode 81..................................................Synchronizing Pocket Word Documents 81..............................Pocket Excel 82..........................................................Creating a Workbook 82.............................................Tips for Working in Pocket Excel 83...................................

Contentsviii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMSN Messenger 84.......................................................Setting Up an Account 85............................................Signing In and Out 85..............................................Working with Contacts 86...........................................Managing Contacts 87..............................................Sending a Message 88...............................................Windows Media Player for Windows Mobile 89.................................Microsoft Reader 90.......................................................Getting Books on Your 700 Color Computer 90..........................Using the Library 91................................................Reading a Book 92.................................................Using Reader Features 93............................................Removing a Book 93................................................Pocket Internet Explorer 94........................................................TheMobileFavoritesFolder 94..............................................Favorite Links 94.........................................................Mobile Favorites 95.......................................................Using AvantGo Channels 96................................................Using Pocket Internet Explorer 96............................................Viewing Mobile Favorites and Channels 97..............................Browsing the Internet 97.............................................Getting Connected 98............................................................Connecting to an Internet Service Provider 98...................................Connecting to Work 102...................................................Creating a Modem Connection to Work 103.............................Creating a Wireless Network Connection 106............................Creating a VPN Server Connection to Work 111..........................Ending a Connection 113..................................................Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server 114....................................Setting Up an E-mail Account 114...........................................Installing Applications117..................................................Packaging an Application 118......................................................Installing Applications 119........................................................Using Microsoft ActiveSync 119.............................................Using the FTP Server 120..................................................Using a Storage Card 120..................................................Copying to a CompactFlash Card 120..................................Copying to a Secure Digital Storage Card 121............................Updating the System Software 121..................................................Application Migration 122........................................................Migrating from a 700 Monochrome Computer 124.....................................3

Contentsix700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualInstalling Cabinet Files 124........................................................Network Support125........................................................Understanding Your 700 Series Computer 126.........................................Antennas (760/761 Computers) 127.................................................Network Adapters 127...........................................................Ethernet Communications (740, 741, 750, 751, 760, 761 Computers) 128............Wireless 802.11 Communications 129.........................................No Networking 130.......................................................Network Selection APIs 130.......................................................Network Connections 131........................................................CORE (760, 761 Computers with WAN Radios) 132...................................Activating CORE 132.....................................................Install an Available Radio Module 132.........................................Loading a Radio Module 133................................................802.11 CF CORE Module 133..............................................General 134......................................................Details 135.......................................................CDMA/1xRTT CORE Module (760 Computers with WAN Radios) 135.............WAN Monitor — General 136........................................WAN Monitor — Details 137........................................GSM/GPRS CORE Module (760 Computers with WAN Radios) 138................WAN Monitor — General 138........................................WAN Monitor — Details 139........................................Microsoft Phone Application (761 Computers with CDMA Radios) 140.....................Data Provisioning (Sprint) 140..............................................Phone Application 143.....................................................Speed Dial 144....................................................Call History 144...................................................Tools 145........................................................Phone Settings 146.................................................Microsoft Phone Application (761 Computers with GSM Radios) 149......................Activation 149...........................................................Phone Application 149.....................................................Call History 150...................................................Speed Dial 150....................................................Tools 151........................................................Phone Settings 151.................................................4

Contentsx 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPhoneUtility (760 Computers with GPRS Radios) 154..................................Audio Mode 154.........................................................Notification 155..........................................................Advanced Audio 155......................................................SB555 Watcher (760 Computers with CDMA Radios) 157...............................Copying CDMA Radio Module CAB Files from Intermec Web Site 157..............Via Microsoft ActiveSync 158...............................................Via a CompactFlash or Secure Digital Storage Card 158...........................Finishing the Installation 159...............................................Activation 160...........................................................Verizon Automated Activation Process 163.....................................Sprint Automated Activation Process 167......................................Download and Activate Sprint Watcher 167..............................Using Sprint Watcher 170...........................................Data Provisioning 173..............................................Telus and Bell Mobility Activation 176........................................AT Command Interface (760 Computers) 177..................................Command Set for Sierra Wireless SB555 177.............................Command Set for Siemens MC45 or MC46 177..........................Testing the AT Commands 178.......................................Wireless Personal Area Networking 182..............................................Documentation 182.......................................................About the Application 182..................................................Mode 182........................................................Wireless Printing 183...............................................File Transfer 184...................................................AutoIP/DHCP 186..............................................................SNMP Configuration on the 700 Color Computer 187..................................Management Information Base 187...........................................Object Identifiers 188.....................................................Configuring with SNMP 188...............................................Printer Support189..........................................................Printing ASCII 190..............................................................Directly to a Port 190.....................................................Directly to a Generic Serial Port 190..........................................IrDA Printer Driver 190..........................................................5

Contentsxi700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNPCP Printer Driver 191.........................................................About NPCP 191........................................................NPCP Driver Installation and Removal 191....................................Opening the NPCP Driver 192..............................................Closing the NPCP Driver 192...............................................Reading from the NPCP Driver 192..........................................Writing to the NPCP Driver 192.............................................NPCP Driver I/O Controls 193..............................................NPCP Printer Communications 194..........................................Sample Code 194.........................................................NPCP Error Codes 195....................................................O’Neil Printer Driver 196.........................................................DTR Driver Installation and Removal 196.....................................Opening the DTR Driver 197...............................................Closing the DTR Driver 197................................................Writing to the DTR Driver 197..............................................DTR Printer Communications 197...........................................Scanner Support199.........................................................Scanner Control and Data Transfer 200..............................................Data Collection Configuration 201..................................................Internal Scanners 202............................................................For Units With PSM Build 3.00 or Newer 202..................................Scanner and Imager Settings 203.............................................Internal Scanner Supported Symbologies 203....................................Tethered Scanners 204...........................................................For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3.00 204................................Enabling and Disabling 204..........................................Error Message 205.................................................Changing Comm Settings 205........................................Scanner Cabling 207................................................Limitations and Capabilities 207.......................................For Units With PSM Build 3.00 or Newer 209..................................Configuring the Tethered Scanner 209..................................Troubleshooting the 1551E/1553 Tethered Scanner 212....................Reset Factory Defaults 212...........................................Tethered Scanner Supported Symbologies 213...................................6

Contentsxii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualProgramming215............................................................Creating CAB Files 216..........................................................Creating Device-Specific CAB Files 216.......................................Creating an .INF File 216............................................Sample .INF File 225...............................................Using Installation Functions in SETUP.DLL 228................................After the CAB File Extraction 228............................................Creating CAB Files with CAB Wizard 231.....................................Troubleshooting the CAB Wizard 232.........................................Customization and Lockdown 233..................................................FTP Server 234.................................................................Configurable Parameters Via the Registry Editor 235.............................BlockSize 235.....................................................DeviceName 235..................................................DeviceURL 235...................................................IDNATarget 236..................................................ManifestName 236.................................................PauseAtStartup 236.................................................Root 236.........................................................Transferring Files Over TCP/IP Networks 237..................................Stopping the FTP Server from Your Application 240..............................Autostart FTP 240........................................................Kernel I/O Controls 242..........................................................IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO 242.....................................IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM 243.......................................IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM 247...................................IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID 249........................................IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO 250....................................IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO 251..........................IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT 252...........................................IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT 252............................................IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO 253......................................IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE 254....................................IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT 255...............................................IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION 256.................................IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID 257................................................7

Contentsxiii700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNetwork Selection APIs 258.......................................................Basic Connect/Disconnect Functions 260......................................RadioConnect() 260................................................RadioDisconnect() 260..............................................RadioDisassociate() 261.............................................Query Information Functions 261............................................GetAssociationStatus() 261...........................................GetAuthenticationMode() 262........................................GetBSSID() 262...................................................GetDiversity() 263.................................................GetLinkSpeed() 263................................................GetMac() 264.....................................................GetNetworkMode() 264.............................................GetNetworkType() 265..............................................GetSSID() 265....................................................GetPowerMode() 266...............................................GetRSSI() 266....................................................GetTXPower() 267.................................................GetWepStatus() 268................................................GetRadioIpAddress() 269............................................GetCCXStatus() 269................................................Set Information Functions 270..............................................AddWep() 270....................................................EnableWep() 270..................................................EncryptionStatus() 271..............................................SetAuthenticationMode() 272.........................................SetChannel() 272..................................................SetNetworkMode() 273.............................................SetPowerMode() 273................................................SetSSID() 274.....................................................SetCCXStatus() 274................................................SetMixedCellMode() 274............................................RemoveWep() 275.................................................Helper Functions 275.....................................................ConfigureProfile() 275..............................................EnableZeroConfig() 276.............................................isZeroConfigEnabled() 276...........................................isOrinoco() 276....................................................isSupplicantRunning() 277...........................................StartScanList() 277.................................................StartSupplicant() 277...............................................StopSupplicant() 278...............................................isDHCPEnabled() 278..............................................RenewDHCP() 278................................................GetCurrentDriverName() 279........................................ResetRadioToSystemSave() 279.......................................EnableSuppLogging() 279............................................SwitchPacketDriver() 280............................................Deprecated Functions 280..................................................

Contentsxiv 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNotifications 281...............................................................NLEDGetDeviceInfo 282..................................................NLEDSetDevice 282......................................................Reboot Functions 283............................................................IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT 283...............................................IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT 283............................................IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT 283...........................................Remapping the Keypad 284.......................................................Unshifted Plane 284.......................................................Gold Plane 284..........................................................Alpha (Blue) Plane 285....................................................Key Values 285..........................................................Numeric Keypad 285...............................................Alphanumeric Keypad 285...........................................How Key Values Are Stored in Registry 286....................................Change Notification 286...................................................Advanced Keypad Remapping 286............................................Scan Codes 287..........................................................Numeric Keypad 287...............................................Alphanumeric Keypad 288...........................................Sample View of Registry Keys 290............................................Configurable Settings291...................................................Configuration Parameters 292......................................................Changing a Parameter Setting 292............................................About Configuration Parameters 293..........................................Data Collection Control Panel Applet 294............................................Symbologies 295.........................................................Code 39 296......................................................Standard 2 of 5 297.................................................Codabar 298......................................................UPC/EAN 299....................................................Code 93 300......................................................Code 128 301.....................................................Plessey 304.......................................................MSI 305.........................................................PDF417 306......................................................Interleaved 2 of 5 309...............................................Matrix 2 of 5 310..................................................Telepen 311......................................................Code 11 312......................................................QR Code 313.....................................................Data Matrix 314...................................................MaxiCode 315....................................................A

Contentsxv700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSymbology Options 316....................................................Symbology ID 316.................................................Prefix 322........................................................Suffix 323........................................................Beeper/LED 324.........................................................Beeper 325.......................................................Beeper Volume 326.................................................Beeper Frequency 327...............................................Good Read Beeps 328...............................................Good Read Beep Duration 329........................................Imager 330..............................................................Aimer LED Duration 330............................................Sticky Aimer Duration 331...........................................Image Dimension 332...............................................Lighting Mode 333.................................................1D OmniDir Decode Enable 334......................................Virtual Wedge 335........................................................Virtual Wedge 335.................................................Preamble 336.....................................................Postamble 338.....................................................Grid 340.........................................................Code Page 341....................................................Intermec Settings Control Panel Applet 342...........................................SNMP Control Panel Applet 343...................................................Security 344.............................................................Read Only Community 344..........................................Read/Write Community 345.........................................Read Encryption 346...............................................Write Encryption 347...............................................Encryption Key 348................................................Traps 349...............................................................Authentication 349.................................................Threshold 350.....................................................Identification 351.........................................................Contact 351......................................................Name 352........................................................Location 353......................................................Unit Information Control Panel Applet 354...........................................Versions 354............................................................Battery Status 355........................................................CAB Files 356...........................................................Utilities Control Panel Applet 358..................................................Dock Switch 358.........................................................Registry Save 359.........................................................Wakeup Mask 360........................................................App Launch 361.........................................................

Contentsxvi 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWireless Network Control Panel Applet 363...........................................About the Wireless Network 363.............................................Terminology 363.........................................................Configuring Your Wireless Network 365.......................................Basic 366.........................................................Security 367......................................................Advanced 384.....................................................Other Configurable Parameters 385.................................................Audio Volume 385........................................................Automatic Shutoff 385.....................................................Backlight Timeout 386....................................................Date/Time 386..........................................................Key Clicks 386...........................................................Using Reader Commands 387......................................................Change Configuration 387.................................................Set Time and Date 388....................................................Configuration Bar Codes 389......................................................Audio Volume 389........................................................Automatic Shutoff 390.....................................................Backlight Timeout 390....................................................Key Clicks 391...........................................................Virtual Wedge Grid, Preamble, Postamble 392..................................Grid 392.........................................................Preamble 392.....................................................Postamble 392.....................................................Bar Code Symbologies393..................................................Codabar 394...................................................................Code 11 394...................................................................Code 39 394...................................................................Encoded Code 39 (Concatenation) 395........................................Encoded Code 39 (Full ASCII) 395...........................................Code 93 395...................................................................Code 128 396..................................................................Data Matrix 397................................................................EAN (European Article Numbering) 397.............................................B

Contentsxvii700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualI 2 of 5 (Interleaved) 398.........................................................Matrix 2 of 5 398...............................................................MaxiCode 398.................................................................PDF417 398...................................................................Plessey 399....................................................................QR Code (Quick Response Code) 400...............................................S2of5(Standard2of5) 400......................................................Telepen 401...................................................................UPC (Universal Product Code) 401.................................................IndexClasses and Functions 404........................................................General Index 410...............................................................Files Index 426.................................................................I

Contentsxviii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Before You Beginxix700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualBefore You BeginThis section provides you with safety information, technical supportinformation, and sources for additional product information.Safety SummaryYour safety is extremely important. Read and follow all warnings andcautions in this document before handling and operating Intermecequipment. You can be seriously injured, and equipment and data can bedamaged if you do not follow the safety warnings and cautions.DonotrepairoradjustaloneDo not repair or adjust energized equipment alone under anycircumstances. Someone capable of providing first aid must always bepresent for your safety.First aidAlways obtain first aid or medical attention immediately after an injury.Never neglect an injury, no matter how slight it seems.ResuscitationBegin resuscitation immediately if someone is injured and stops breathing.Any delay could result in death. To work on or near high voltage, youshould be familiar with approved industrial first aid methods.Energized equipmentNever work on energized equipment unless authorized by a responsibleauthority. Energized electrical equipment is dangerous. Electrical shockfrom energized equipment can cause death. If you must performauthorized emergency work on energized equipment, be sure that youcomply strictly with approved safety regulations.

Before You Beginxx 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSafety IconsThis section explains how to identify and understand dangers, warnings,cautions, and notes that are in this manual. You may also see icons that tellyou when to follow ESD procedures and when to take special precautionsfor handling optical parts.A warning alerts you of an operating procedure, practice, condition,or statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or seriousinjury to the persons working on the equipment.Avertissement: Un avertissement vous avertit d’une procédure defonctionnement, d’une méthode, d’un état ou d’un rapport qui doitêtre strictement respecté pour éviterl’occurrencedemortoudeblessures graves aux personnes manupulant l’équipement.A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, orstatement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damageor destruction, or corruption or loss of data.Attention: Une précaution vous avertit d’une procédure defonctionnement, d’une méthode, d’un état ou d’un rapport qui doitêtre strictement respecté pour empêcher l’endommagement ou ladestruction de l’équipement, ou l’altération ou la perte de données.Note: Notes either provide extra information about a topic or containspecial instructions for handling a particular condition or set ofcircumstances.

Before You Beginxxi700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGlobal Services and SupportWarranty InformationTo understand the warranty for your Intermec product, visit the Intermecweb site at www.intermec.com and click Service & Support.TheIntermecGlobal Sales & Service page appears. From the Service & Support menu,move your pointer over Support,andthenclickWarranty.Disclaimerofwarranties:Thesamplecodeincludedinthisdocumentispresented for reference only. The code does not necessarily representcomplete, tested programs. The code is provided “as is with all faults.” Allwarranties are expressly disclaimed, including the implied warranties ofmerchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.Web SupportVisit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com to download our currentmanuals in PDF format. To order printed versions of the Intermecmanuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor.Visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) atintermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to requesttechnical support for your Intermec product.Telephone SupportThese services are available from Intermec Technologies Corporation.Service DescriptionIn the U.S.A. and Canadacall 1-800-755-5505and choose this optionFactory Repair andOn-site RepairRequest a return authorizationnumber for authorized servicecenter repair, or request anon-site repair technician.1Technical Support Get technical support on yourIntermec product.2Service ContractStatusInquire about an existingcontract, renew a contract, or askinvoicing questions.3Schedule Site Surveysor InstallationsSchedule a site survey, or requesta product or system installation.4Ordering Products Talk to sales administration,place an order, or check thestatus of your order.5Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your local Intermecrepresentative. To search for your local representative, from the Intermecweb site, click Contact.

Before You Beginxxii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWhoShouldReadthisManual?This manual provides you with information about the features of the 700Series Color Mobile Computer and how to configure, troubleshoot, andsupport it. You must be familiar with your host PC, your network, andyour other Intermec equipment.Related DocumentsThis table contains a list of related Intermec documents and their partnumbers.Document Title Part Number700 Color with Windows Mobile 2003 Quick Start Guide 962-054-069730 Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide 962-054-068Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual 073529Intermec Developer’s Library CD 235-114-001 (Kit)700C Recovery CD Windows Mobile 2003 Edition English 235-110-001 (Kit)The Intermec web site at www.intermec.com contains many of ourdocuments that you can download in PDF format.To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your localIntermec representative or distributor.

1700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIntroduction1This chapter introduces the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer, devel-oped by Intermec Technologies Corporation to enhance wireless connec-tivity needs.This chapter contains hardware and software configuration information toassist you in making the most out of your 700 Color Computer.Note: “700 Color” pertains to 740, 741, 750, 751, 760, and 761 Com-puters unless otherwise noted.The components include:SAmbient light sensors (next page)SAudio system (page 3)SBattery (page 5)SBeeper (page 7)SKeypad (page 11)SModem support (page 16)SPSM build version (page 16)SResetting your 700 Series Computer (page 17)SSoftware build version (page 18)SStorage media (page 19)SVibrator (page 20)SWireless network support (page 21)Note: Desktop icons and control panel applet icons are shown to the left.

IntroductionChapter —12 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAmbient Light SensorNote: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer.The ambient light sensor turns on the display lighting when conditionswarrant but automatically turns if off again as surrounding light increases.This conserves your 700 Color battery power.Ambient LightSensor Ambient LightSensorThis illustration shows the 700 Color Computer with a numeric keypad (left) and an alphanumerickeypad (right).To adjust the ambient light sensor, tap Start >Settings >theSystem tab >the Backlight icon > the Both Power tab. Make your selections, then tapok to exit this applet.

Introduction—Chapter 13700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAudio SystemThe audio system consists of the speaker, internal microphone, and theexternal headset jack.SpeakerA speaker capable of variable volume levels is located on the back of thecomputer. This speaker has a transducer volume of 85 dB min at 10 CMand a frequency range of 1–8 KHz.Speaker Speaker700 Color Computer 730 ComputerWarning: Do not place the speaker next to your ear when the speakervolume is set to “Loud” (maximum), or you may damage yourhearing.

IntroductionChapter —14 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMicrophoneThe built-in microphone is located on the bottom of the unit next to theHirose docking connector.Charging/Dockingconnector MicrophoneThis is the bottom of the 700 Color Computer. Note that the keypad is to the bottom in thisillustration.External Headset JackThe external headset jack connects a mobile phone style headset to yourmobile computer for use in noisy environments. The jack is a 2.5 mm,three-conductor jack, with autosensing of the headset jack insertion whichdisables the internal speaker and microphone. The external headset jack islocated on the bottom of the mobile computer next to the Hirose dockingconnector.Charging/DockingconnectorHeadset jackThis is the bottom of the 700 Color Computer. Note that the keypad is to the bottom in thisillustration.

Introduction—Chapter 15700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualBatteryThe 700 Color Computer comes with a 14.4 Watt-hour, 7.2V,replaceable Lithium-Ion (LiIon) battery.The 730 Computer comes with an 8.8 Watt-hour, 3.7V, replaceable LiIonbattery.To view the status of this battery, tap Start >Settings >theSystem tab >the Power icon > the Power tab to view the current status of both themain battery and the backup battery. Tap ok to exit this information.For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3.00You can also view the battery status by accessing the Unit Informationcontrol panel applet. Tap Start >Settings >theSystem tab>theUnitInformation icon > the Battery Status tab to view the current status. Tapok to exit this information.

IntroductionChapter —16 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIf your computer shuts down because of low battery conditions, your com-puter does not operate. This is done to ensure that data is protected. Al-though the battery does protect the data against loss for several hours, youshould connect your computer to a power source when you first detect alow battery condition.Your computer contains an internal super capacitor, a temporary powerstorage device, that protects data for up to ten minutes. This is to give youtime to replace the main battery pack before that data is lost. Be sure to putthe computer in a suspend mode before doing so.If you have at least one device in your 700 Color Computer (radio, scan-ner, imager, or Ethernet), the battery power fail level is set so that after thesystem shuts down in a low battery condition, there is still sufficient chargeto allow the unit to remain configured, keep proper time, and maintainDRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) for at least 23 to 32 hours atroom temperature if the main battery remains in the mobile computer.The configuration and time are lost if:SThe battery discharges beyond this level.SThe battery is removed when the computer is not in suspend mode.SA cold reset is performed on the computer.You can modify RAM maintenance in a limited way. On the 700 ColorComputer, tap Start >Settings >theSystem tab>thePower icon > theBattery tab. Drag the slider bar to the right to change the suspend voltageto favor suspend time over rundown time, then click ok to exit.

Introduction—Chapter 17700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualBeeperNote: Each time the 700 Color Computer is cold-booted, all default set-tings are restored unless registry storage is enabled. See page 123 for infor-mation about enabling the registry storage.For information about setting volume levels for screen taps, ActiveSyncalert noises, etc., tap Start >Help >Pocket PC Basics, then selectNotifications.Enable the BeeperTo enable the beeper:1Tap Start >Settings >thePersonal tab > Sounds & Notifications >theVolume tab.2Drag the System volume slider bar to the right of the “Silent” position.3Tap ok to exit this applet.

IntroductionChapter —18 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualDisable the Scanner MuteNote: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer.Todisablethemutefeatureonthescanner.1Tap Start >Settings >theSystem tab>theAudio icon, then selectUser defined audio settings.2Tap the Input Mixing tab, then clear the SCAN Mute box.3Drag its slider bar (note the greyed slider bar) to the appropriate level ofloudest, with the left side being the most loud and the right side beingthe most quiet. Tap ok to exit this applet.

Introduction—Chapter 19700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSelect a Beeper VolumeNote: The 730 Computer does not support the laser scanner.To determine your PSM Build version, tap Start >Programs >File Ex-plorer >theFlash File Store folder > the PSMinfo text file.For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3.00Do the following to select a beeper volume. 700 Color Computers builtwith a laser scanner have three options: Off, High, or Medium. 700Computers built with an imager have just two: Beeper or Vibrate. 730Computers have just the Beeper option. See Appendix A, “ConfigurableSettings,” for more information about the Beeper Volume or Beeperoption.1Tap Start >Settings >theSystem tab>theData Collection icon toaccess its control panel applet.2Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Beeper/LED tab, then tapthis tab.3For units with laser scanners:Tap Beeper Volume, select an option, then tap Apply to change the set-ting.For units with imagers:Select either option, then tap Apply to change the setting. For 730 Com-puters, the Vibrate option is not supported.4Tap ok to confirm this change, then tap ok to exit the Data Collectioncontrol panel applet.700 Color with Imager Screen 730 Screen700 Color with Laser ScannerScreen

IntroductionChapter —110 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualFor Units With PSM Build 3.00 or NewerTo select a beeper volume for the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Set-tings >theSystem tab>theIntermec Settings icon. Tap the Device Set-tings option, tap (+) to expand Beeper, then tap (+) to expand Volume.Select an item, then close this option.700 Color Screen 730 ScreenNote: Information about the settings you can configure with the IntermecSettings control panel applet is described in the Intermec Computer Com-mand Reference Manual (P/N: 073529). The online manual is availablefrom the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com.Disable the BeeperDo the following to disable the beeper:1Tap Start >Settings >thePersonal tab > Sounds & Notification >theVolume tab.2Drag the System volume slider completely to the left to “Silent.”3Tap ok to exit this applet.

Introduction—Chapter 111700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualKeypadInstructions for the keypad include the backlight and keypress sequences.Backlight for KeypadNote: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer.You can configure your keypad to turn on a backlight to assist you whenyou are working in low lighting. To adjust the backlight for the keypad,tap Start >Settings >theSystem tab > Backlight. Use the left/right scrollarrows to move to and tap the Keyboard tab. Make your selection, thentap ok to exit this applet.

IntroductionChapter —112 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualKey SequencesUse the following key sequences to enter characters into your 700 ColorComputer using either a numeric keypad or an alphanumeric keypad.[Gold] or [Gold/White] Plane KeysThe [Gold] bplane key (numeric keypad) or the [Gold/White] cplanekey (alphanumeric keypad) provides you access to display controls, specialcharacters, and Pocket PC options.Press the [Gold] bkey or the [Gold/White] ckey for each gold planekey stroke you wish to make. For example to turn on the front light, pressandholdthe[Gold] bkey plus the 3key on the numeric keypad orpress and hold the [Gold/White] ckey plus the Ikey on the alphanu-meric keypad. To turn the front light off, press the appropriate keys again.Belowandonthenextpagearethekeysequences.Numeric KeypadThe following table lists sequences that use the [Gold] bplane key. SeeChapter 2, “Windows Mobile 2003,” for information about the Pocket PCapplications.Press the Keys To Do This[Gold]b3Toggle the backlight on or off (also goes through backlightpower levels if held down)[Gold]baAccess the Pocket PC Record application (see Note).[Gold]b4Access the Pocket PC Calendar application (see Note).[Gold]b5Access the Pocket PC Contacts application (see Note).[Gold]b6Access the Pocket PC Tasks application (see Note).[Gold]b7Move up one page.[Gold]b8Enter an asterisk (*).[Gold]b9Move down one page.[Gold]b0Access the Pocket PC Start menu.[Gold]beEnter an at symbol (@).[Gold]bKEnter a backslash (/).[Gold]bEEnter a minus sign (–).[Gold]bAEnter a plus sign (+).[Gold]b→Tab to the right.[Gold]b←Tab to the left.[Gold]bUIncrease volume[Gold]bDDecrease volumeNote: Pocket PC applications are accessible only if configured to do so in the App Launchportion of the Utilities control panel applet. See page 358 for more information.

Introduction—Chapter 113700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAlphanumeric KeypadNote: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer.The following table lists sequences that use the [Gold/White] cplanekey. See Chapter 2, “Windows Mobile 2003,” for information about thePocket PC applications.Press the Keys To Do This[Gold/White]cIToggle the backlight on or off (also goes through backlightpower levels if held down)[Gold/White]cAAccess the Pocket PC Record application (see Note).[Gold/White]cBAccess the Pocket PC Calendar application (see Note).[Gold/White]cCAccess the Pocket PC Contacts application (see Note).[Gold/White]cDAccess the Pocket PC Tasks application (see Note).[Gold/White]cJMove up one page.[Gold/White]cGEnter an asterisk (*).[Gold/White]cPMove down one page.[Gold/White]cEAccess the Pocket PC Start menu.[Gold/White]cKEnter an at symbol (@).[Gold/White]cHEnter a backslash (/).[Gold/White]cLEnter a minus sign (–).[Gold/White]cREnter a plus sign (+).[Gold/White]clTab to the right.[Gold/White]cjTab to the left.[Gold/White]ckIncrease volume[Gold/White]cmDecrease volumeNote: Pocket PC applications are accessible only if configured to do so in the App Launchportion of the Utilities control panel applet. See page 358 for more information.

IntroductionChapter —114 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAlpha (Blue) Plane KeysThe alphabet can be entered with either the numeric keypad or the alpha-numeric keypad. Below and on the next page are the key sequences.Numeric KeypadWhen you press F, the Scanning/Alpha LED (C)shows‘red’forthe Alpha mode. The keypad stays in Alpha mode until you press F.To type a lowercase ‘c,’ press F222(the [2] key threetimes). To type a letter on the same key as the last letter entered, wait twoseconds, then enter the correct series of keystrokes to create the next letter.WhileyouareintheAlphamodeandyoupress1to initiate the CAPSmode, you will render a CAPS LOCK until you press 1again. Onceyou are in CAPS mode, you stay in CAPS until it is pressed again.Press 0to enter a space.To Enter Press the Keys To Enter Press the KeysaF2 AF12bF22 BF122cF222 CF1222dF3 DF13eF33 EF133fF333 FF1333gF4 GF14hF44 HF144iF444 IF1444jF5 JF15kF55 KF155lF555 LF1555mF6 MF16nF66 NF166oF666 OF1666pF7 PF17qF77 QF177rF777 RF1777sF7777 SF17777tF8 TF18uF88 UF188vF888 VF1888wF9 WF19xF99 XF199yF999 YF1999zF9999 ZF19999

Introduction—Chapter 115700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAlphanumeric KeypadWhen you press d, the Scanning/Alpha LED (C) lights ‘red’ to indi-cate Alpha mode. The keypad stays in the Alpha mode until you press dagain.If you want to type a lowercase ‘c,’ press dC. If you want an uppercase“C,” press and hold the gkey, then press C.Press bto enter a space.To Enter Press the Keys To Enter Press the KeysadAAdgAbdBBdgBcdCCdgCddDDdgDedEEdgEfdFFdgFgdGGdgGhdHHdgHidIIdgIjdJJdgJkdKKdgKldLLdgLmdMMdgMndNNdgNodOOdgOpdPPdgPqdQQdgQrdRRdgRsdSSdgStdTTdgTudUUdgUvdVVdgVwdWWdgWxdXXdgXydYYdgYzdZZdgZ

IntroductionChapter —116 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualModem SupportThe 700 ColorComputer has the following modem options:SModem dock that provides charging and includes a built-in modem anda serial port between which an application can switch.SSnap-on modem, a stand-alone product, that attaches to the bottom ofyour 700 Color Computer. Note that you cannot place this modem in adock, printer, or other devices. Contact your Intermec representative formore information.PSM Build VersionThe Persistent Storage Manager (PSM) is an area of storage which is em-bedded in a section of the system’s FLASH memory. This storage area isnot erased during a cold-boot. It may, however, be erased during the re-flashing process. In addition to storing applications and data files, you dohave the option to store a persistent registry to the PSM region.To determine what PSM Build is on your 700 Color Computer, tap Start>Programs >File Explorer. Access the Flash File Store folder from theMy Device root directory, then tap the PSMinfo textfile.Takenoteofyour information, then tap ok to exit.

Introduction—Chapter 117700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualResetting Your 700 Color ComputerIn some cases where the 700 Color Computer completely stops respond-ing, it may be necessary to perform a cold reset. Because cold resetting mayresult in data loss, it is not recommended unless all other recovery methodshave failed.Note: Cold resetting deletes all programs and data stored in RAM includ-ing the Object Store. Make sure data is backed up to your host computeror a storage card before performing a cold reset.1Release the lower clip of the hand strap.2Remove the battery pack.3Press the Reset button.4Reinstall the battery pack.Reset button Reset button700 Color Computer 730 ComputerThis illustration shows the back of the 700 Color Computer on the left and of the 730 Computer on the right.

Introduction—Chapter 119700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualStorage MediaNote: MultiMediaCards (MMCs) are not supported in 700 Color Com-puters.The 700 Color Computer supports both CompactFlash and Secure Digitalstorage cards. To access either card slot, locate the access door at the top ofthe 700 Color Computer, remove its two screws, then remove the door.See the 700 Color with Windows Mobile 2003 Quick Start Guide (P/N:962-054-069) for more information.The 730 Computer only supports the Secure Digital storage card. TheCompactFlash card slot is embedded in the 730 Computer and cannot beremoved. To access the Secure Digital card slot, locate the access door atthe top of the 730 Computer, remove its screws, then remove the door.See the Model 730 Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide (P/N:962-054-068) for more information.CompactFlash CardsOn 700 Color Computers, the CompactFlash card slot accepts either astorage card or the 802.11b or 802.11b/g radio, which is factory-installedand cannot be removed. The 730 Computer does not support Compact-Flash storage cards.Secure Digital CardsThe Secure Digital card slot accepts storage cards only.Storage MediaAccess Door700 Color Computer 730 ComputerThis illustration shows the top of the 700 Color Computer on the left and of the 730 Computer onthe right. Note that the keypad is to the bottom.

IntroductionChapter —120 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualVibratorNote: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer.Ifyour700ColorComputerisbuiltwithanimagerorscannerandthevibrator is disabled, do the following instructions to enable the vibrator. Ifyou are not able to enable the vibrator, then contact Customer Support.For information about setting volume levels for screen taps, ActiveSyncalert noises, etc., tap Start>Help >Pocket PC Basics, then selectNotifications.See Chapter 7, “Programming,” to see how to programmatically control thevibrator. See Appendix A, “Configurable Settings,” for more informationabout the Beeper Volume option.Note: Each time the 700 Color Computer is cold-booted, all default set-tings are restored.For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3.001Tap Start >Settings >theSystem tab > Data Collection to access itscontrol panel applet.2Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Beeper/LED tab, then tapthis tab.3Tap Beeper, select the “Vibrate” option, then tap Apply.4Tap ok to confirm this change, then tap ok to exit the Data Collectioncontrol panel applet.

Introduction—Chapter 121700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualFor Units With PSM Build 3.00 or NewerDo the following to enable the vibrator for the 700 Color Computer. TapStart >Settings >theSystem tab>theIntermec Settings icon. Tap theDevice Settings option, tap (+) to expand Beeper, then tap (+) to expandVibrate. Select an item, then close this option.Note: Information about the settings you can configure with the IntermecSettings control panel applet is described in the Intermec Computer Com-mand Reference Manual. The online manual is available from the Intermecweb site at www.intermec.comWireless Network SupportRadios are installed at the factory and cannot be installed by a user. The700 Color Computer must be serviced to install or replace radios. Contactyour Intermec representative for more information. See Chapter 4, “Net-work Support” for information about supported radios.Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by IntermecTechnologies Corporation could void the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

23700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWindows Mobile 20032This chapter introduces Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PC.While using your 700 Color Computer, keep these key points in mind:STap Start on the navigation bar, located at the top of the screen, toquickly move to programs, files, and settings. Use the command bar atthe bottom of the screen to perform tasks in programs. The commandbar includes menus, buttons, and the onscreen keyboard.STap and hold an item to see a pop-up menu containing a list of actionsyou can perform. Pop-up menus give you quick and easy access to themost common actions.Note: “700 Color” pertains to 740, 741, 750, 751, 760, and 761 Com-puters unless otherwise noted.Below is a list of Windows Mobile 2003 components described in thischapter. Tap Start >Help on your 700 Color Computer to find additionalinformation on Windows Mobile components.Windows Mobile 2003 ComponentsMicrosoft ActiveSync Client (page 44)Microsoft Pocket Outlook (page 46)Pocket Word (page 78)Pocket Excel (page 82)MSN Messenger (page 84)Windows Media Player for Pocket PC (page 89)Microsoft Reader (page 90)Pocket Internet Explorer (page 94)

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 225700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWhere to Find InformationThis chapter describes your 700 Color Computer hardware, provides anoverview of the programs on your 700 Color Computer, and explains howto connect your 700 Color Computer to a desktop, a network, or the In-ternet. For instructions on setting up your 700 Color Computer andinstalling ActiveSync, see the Quick Start Guide. The following is a guideto more information to assist you use your 700 Color Computer.For information on: See this source:Programs on your mobile computer. This chapter and mobile computer Help. To view Help,tap Start >Help.Additional programs that can be installed on the mobilecomputer.The Windows Mobile Companion CD.Connecting to and synchronizing with a desktop. The Quick Start Guide or AutoSync Help on your desk-top. To view Help, click Help >Microsoft ActiveSyncHelp.Last-minute updates and detailed technical information. The Read Me files, located in the Microsoft ActiveSyncfolder on the desktop and on the Windows Mobile Com-panion CD.Up-to-date information on your Windows Mobile. http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/resources/communities/default.mspxWindows Mobile and many of the technologies supported by the 700 Col-or Computer are not from Intermec Technologies. Many of the utilitiesand features on a Windows Mobile device come directly from Microsoftwithout any modification from Intermec Technologies. There may be cer-tain Microsoft-specific issues that Intermec Technologies would not beable to support, so contact our front-line support personnel to determinethe best source of assistance.Use these URLs for additional information about Microsoft WindowsMobile (Pocket PC):Shttp://msdn.microsoft.com/support/Shttp://support.microsoft.com/Snews://news.microsoft.com (a free support option)

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —226 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualBasic SkillsLearning to use your 700 Color Computer is easy. This section describesthe basic concepts of using and customizing your 700 Color Computer.Today ScreenWhen you turn on your 700 Color Computer for the first time each day(or after four hours of inactivity),youseetheToday screen. You can alsodisplayitbytappingtheStart flag (shown left) and then Today.OntheToday screen, you can see important information for the day.Taptocreateanew item.Your day at a glance. Tapto open the associatedprogram.Tap to disconnect from ActiveSync.Tap to change ownerinformation.Tap to change date and time.Tap and hold to change time format.Tap to start a program.To customize what is displayed on the Today screen, including the back-ground image, tap Start >Settings >thePersonal tab > Today.Status icons display information such as low batteries or when the 700Color Computer is connected to a desktop or to the Internet. You can tapan icon to open the associated setting or program.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 227700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualProgramsYou can switch from one program to another by selecting it from the Startmenu. (You can customize which programs you see on this menu. Forinformation, see “Adjusting Settings” on page 41.) To access someprograms, tap Start >Programs, and then the program name.You can also switch to some programs by pressing a program button. Your700 Color Computer has one or more program buttons located on thefront or side of the computer. The icons on the buttons identify the pro-grams to which they switch.Note: Some programs have abbreviated labels for check boxes and drop-down menus. To see the full spelling of an abbreviated label, tap and holdthe stylus on the label. Drag the stylus off the label so that the command isnot carried out.The following is a partial list of programs that are on your 700 ColorComputer. Look on the Windows Mobile Companion CD for additionalprograms that you can install onto your 700 Color Computer.Synchronize information between your 700 Color Computer and desktop.Keep track of your appointments and create meeting requests.Keep track of your friends and colleagues.Send and receive e-mail messages.Browse Web and WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) sites, and down-load new programs and files from the Internet.Create handwritten or typed notes, drawings, and recordings.Keep track of your tasks.Play digital audio and video files that are stored on your 700 Series Com-puteroronanetwork.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —228 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNavigation Bar and Command BarThe navigation bar is located at the top of the screen. It displays the activeprogram and current time, and allows you to switch to programs and closescreens.Taptoswitchtoaprogram.Tap to see more programs.Taptoswitchtoaprogramthat you recently used.Tap to change devicesettings.Tap to see a Help topicfor the current screen.Use the command bar at the bottom of the screen to perform tasks in pro-grams. The command bar includes menu names, buttons, and the InputPanel button. To create a new item in the current program, tap New.Tosee the name of a button, tap and hold the stylus on the button. Drag thestylus off the button so that the command is not carried out.Taptoselectmenu commands.Tap to display the inputpanel.Taptoselectbutton commands.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 229700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPop-up MenusUse pop-up menus to quickly perform an action on an item. For example,you can use a pop-up menu to delete or make a copy of an item. To accessa pop-up menu, tap and hold the item on which you want to perform theaction. When the menu appears, tap the action you want to perform, ortap anywhere outside the menu to close the menu without performing theaction.Tap and hold to display thepop-up menu.Lift the stylus and tap the actionyou want.Tap outside the menu toclose it without performingan action.NotificationsWhen you have something to do, your device notifies you in a variety ofways. For example, if you have set up an appointment in Calendar, an e-mail message arrives, or a friend sends you an instant message, you are no-tified in any of the following ways:SA message box appears on the screen.SA sound, which you can specify, is played.SA light flashes on your 700 Color Computer.SThe700ColorComputervibrates.You can choose the notification types.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —230 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualEntering InformationYou can enter information on your 700 Color Computer in several ways,depending on the type of device you have and the program you are using:SSynchronizingUsing Microsoft ActiveSync, synchronize or copy information betweenyour desktop and 700 Color Computer. For more information on Acti-veSync, see ActiveSync Help on your desktop.STypingUsing the input panel, enter typed text into the 700 Color Computer.You can do this by tapping keys on the onscreen keyboard or by usinghandwriting recognition software.SWritingUsing the stylus, write directly on the screen.SDrawingUsing the stylus, draw directly on the screen.SRecordingCreate a stand-alone recording or embed a recording into a document ornote.Use the input panel to enter information in any program on your 700Color Computer. You can either type using the onscreen keyboard orwrite using Block Recognizer,Letter Recognizer,orTranscriber.Ineithercase, the characters appear as typed text on the screen.To show or hide the input panel, tap the Input Panel button. Tap the ar-row next to the Input Panel button to see your choices.Tap to see your choices.Input Panel button.Select an input method.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 231700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWhen you use the input panel, your 700 Color Computer anticipates theword you are typing or writing and displays it above the input panel.When you tap the displayed word, it is inserted into your text at theinsertion point. The more you use your 700 Color Computer, the morewords it learns to anticipate.Tap a text box to displaythe currently selectedinput panel (in this case,Keyboard).To enter characters, tapthem on the onscreenkeyboard.Tap to insert anticipatedword.To change word suggestion options, such as the number of words sug-gested at one time, tap Start >Settings >thePersonal tab > Input >theWord Completion tab.Typing With the Onscreen KeyboardTap the arrow, then tap Keyboard. On the soft keyboard that is dis-played, tap the keys with your stylus.STo type lowercase letters, tap the keys with the stylus.STo type a single uppercase letter or symbol, tap the Shift key. To tapmultiple uppercase letters or symbols, tap the CAP key.STo convert a letter to uppercase, tap and hold the stylus on the letterand drag up.STo add a space, drag the stylus to the right across at least two keys.STo backspace one character, drag the stylus to the left across at leasttwo keys.STo insert a carriage return, tap and hold the stylus anywhere on thekeyboard and drag down.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —232 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNote: If you want to use larger keys, tap the arrow, tap Options,select “Keyboard” from the Input method drop-down list, then selectLarge keys.Using Block RecognizerCharacter recognition software gives you a fast and easy method for enter-ing information in any program on your 700 Color Computer. Letters,numbers, and punctuation you write are translated into typed text.Tap the arrow, then tap Block Recognizer. Write a letter in the box.When you write a letter, it is converted to typed text that appears on thescreen.For specific instructions on using Block Recognizer, with Block Recogniz-er open, tap the question mark next to the writing area.Tap for assistance.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 233700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUsing Letter RecognizerWith Letter Recognizer, you can write letters using the stylus just as youwould on paper.Tap the arrow, then tap Letter Recognizer. Write a letter in the box.When you write a letter, it is converted to typed text that appears on thescreen. For specific instructions on using Letter Recognizer, with LetterRecognizer open, tap the question mark next to the writing area.Tap for assistance.Using TranscriberWith Transcriber, you can write anywhere on the screen using the stylusjust as you would on paper. Unlike Letter Recognizer and Block Recogniz-er, you can write a sentence or more of information. Then, pause and letTranscriber change the written characters to typed characters.Tap the arrow, then tap Transcriber. Write anywhere on the screen.For specific instructions on using Transcriber, with Transcriber open, tapthe question mark in the lower, right-hand corner of the screen.Tap for assistance.Selecting Typed TextIfyouwanttoeditorformattypedtext,youmustselectitfirst.SDrag the stylus across the text you want to select.You can cut, copy, and paste text by tapping and holding the selectedwords and then tapping an editing command on the pop-up menu, or bytapping the command on the Edit menu.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —234 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWriting on the ScreenIn any program that accepts writing, such as the Notes program, and inthe Notes tab in Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks, you can use your stylus towrite directly on the screen. Write the way you do on paper. You can editandformatwhatyouhavewrittenandconverttheinformationtotextatalater time.STap the Pen button to switch to writing mode. This action displayslines on the screen to help you write.Tap to use your stylus like a pen.Note: Some programs that accept writing may not have the Pen button.Seethedocumentationforthatprogramtofindouthowtoswitchtowrit-ing mode.Selecting the WritingIfyouwanttoeditorformatwriting,youmustselectitfirst.1Tap and hold the stylus next to the text you want to select until the in-sertion point appears.2Without lifting, drag the stylus across the text you want to select.If you accidentally write on the screen, tap Tools >Undo and try again.You can also select text by tapping the Pen button to deselect it and thendragging the stylus across the screen.You can cut, copy, and paste written text in the same way you work withtyped text: tap and hold the selected words and then tap an editing com-mand on the pop-up menu, or tap the command on the Edit menu.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 235700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualConverting Writing to TextYou can convert words you write in print or cursive to text by tappingTools >Recognize. If a word is not recognized, it stays in its written form.If you want to convert only certain words, tap Pen to disable the writingfunction, tap twice over the word or phrase to highlight, then tap Tools >Recognize.Tap to disable the pen function.Select the text you want toconvert and tap Recognizeon the pop-up menu.The writing is turnedinto text.If the conversion is incorrect, you can choose different words from a list ofalternates or return to the original writing. To do so, tap and hold theincorrect word (tap one word at a time). On the pop-up menu, tapAlternates. Tap the word you want to use from the menu with a list ofalternate words, or tap the writing at the top of the menu to return to theoriginal writing.Taptoreturntoyouroriginal writing.Or, tap the word youwant to use.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —236 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTips for getting good recognition:SWrite neatly.SWrite on the lines and draw descenders below the line. Write the crossof the “t” and apostrophes below the top line so they are not confusedwith the word above. Write periods and commas above the baseline.SFor better recognition, try increasing the zoom level to 300% by usingthe Tools menu. Recognition does not work well below a 150% zoomlevel.SWrite the letters of a word closely and leave big gaps between words sothat the 700 Color Computer can easily tell where words begin and end.SHyphenated words, foreign words that use special characters such as ac-cents, and some punctuation cannot be converted.SIf you add writing to a word to change it (such as changing a “3” to an“8”) after you attempt to recognize the word, the writing you add is notincluded if you attempt to recognize the writing again.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 237700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualDrawing on the ScreenYou can draw on the screen in the same way that you write on the screen.The difference between writing and drawing on the screen is how you se-lect items and how they are edited. For example, you can resize selecteddrawings, while you cannot resize writing.Creating a DrawingSCross three ruled lines on your first stroke. A drawing box appears. Sub-sequent strokes in or touching the drawing box become part of the dra-wing. Drawings that do not cross three ruled lines are treated as writing.The drawing box indicatesthe boundaries of thedrawing.Pen button.Note: You may want to change the zoom level so that you can more easilywork on or view your drawing. Tap Tools and then a zoom level.Selecting a DrawingIfyouwanttoeditorformatadrawing,youmustselectitfirst.STap and hold the stylus on the drawing until the selection handle ap-pears. To select multiple drawings, deselect the Pen button and thendrag to select the drawings you want.You can cut, copy, and paste selected drawings by tapping and holding theselected drawing and then tapping an editing command on the pop-upmenu, or by tapping the command on the Edit menu. To resize a drawing,make sure the Pen button is not selected, and drag a selection handle.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —238 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualRecording a MessageIn any program where you can write or draw on the screen, you can alsoquickly capture thoughts, reminders, and phone numbers by recording amessage.In the Inbox program, you can add a recording to an e-mail message. InCalendar, Tasks, and Contacts, you can include a recording in the Notestab. In the Notes program, you can create a stand-alone recording or add arecording to an open note.Creating a Recording1Hold the 700 Color Computer’s microphone near your mouth orsource of sound.2Tap and make your recording.3Tap when finished. If you are recording in an open note, an iconappears in the note. If you are creating a stand-alone recording, it ap-pears in the note list.4To play a recording, tap the recording icon in the open note or tap therecording in the note list.Note: To quickly create a recording, hold down the Record hardware but-ton. When you hear the beep, begin your recording. Release the buttonwhen you are finished. The new recording is stored in the open note or asa stand-alone recording if no note is open.To play a recording, tap it in the list or tap its icon in the note.Indicates an em-bedded recording.Tap to begin recording.Tap to show or hide the Recording toolbar.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 239700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUsing My TextWhen using Inbox or MSN Messenger, use My Text to quickly insert pre-set or frequently used messages into the text entry area. To insert a mes-sage, tap My Text and tap a message.STo quickly add common messages, tap My Text and tap a desired mes-sage.STo edit a My Text message, tap Tools >Edit My Text Messages.Tapthe message you want to edit and enter new text at the bottom of thescreen.Tap to select a prewritten message.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —240 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualFinding and Organizing InformationThe Find feature on your 700 Color Computer helps you quickly locateinformation.Tap Start >Find. Enter the text you want to find, select a data type, andthen tap Go to initiate the search.Note: To quickly find information that is taking up storage space on your700 Color Computer, select Larger than 64 KB in Type.You can also use the File Explorer to find files on your 700 Color Com-puter and to organize these files into folders. Tap Start >Programs >FileExplorer.Tap the folder nameto open it.Tap New Folder tocreate a new folder.Note: You can move files in File Explorer by tapping and holding the itemyou want to move, and then tapping Cut or Copy and Paste on the pop-up menu.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 241700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCustomizing Your 700 Color ComputerYou can customize your 700 Color Computer by adjusting settings andinstalling additional software.Adjusting SettingsYou can adjust settings to suit the way you work. To see available options,tap Start >Settings > either of the following tabs located at the bottom ofthescreen.Youmightwanttoadjustthefollowing:Personal TabMenus:To customize what appears on the Start menu, and to enable a pop-upmenu from the New button.Owner Information:Toenteryourcontactinformation.Password:To limit access to your 700 Color Computer.Today:To customize the look and information displayed on the Today screen.System TabClock:To change the time or to set alarms.Power:To maximize battery life.Adding or Removing ProgramsPrograms added to your 700 Color Computer at the factory are stored inROM (Read Only Memory). You cannot remove this software, and youcannot accidentally lose ROM contents. ROM programs can be updatedusing special installation programs with a *.XIP extension. All other pro-grams and data files added to your 700 Color Computer after factoryinstallation are stored in RAM (Random Access Memory).You can install any program created for your 700 Color Computer, as longas your 700 Color Computer has enough memory. The most popularplace to find software for your 700 Color Computer is on the WindowsMobile Web site (http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/resources/communities/default.mspx).

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —242 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAdding Programs Using ActiveSyncInstall the appropriate software for your 700 Color Computer on yourdesktop before installing it on your 700 Color Computer.1Determine your 700 Color Computer and processor type so that youknow which version of the software to install. Tap Start >Settings >theSystem tab > About >theVersion tab, then make a note of theinformation in Processor.2Download the program to your desktop (or insert the CD or disk thatcontains the program into your desktop). You may see a single *.XIP,*.EXE, or *.ZIP file, a SETUP.EXE file, or several versions of files fordifferent 700 Color Computer types and processors. Be sure to selectthe program designed for the Windows Mobile and your 700 ColorComputer processor type.3Read any installation instructions, Read Me files, or documentation thatcomes with the program. Many programs provide special installationinstructions.4Connect your 700 Color Computer and desktop.5Double-click the *.EXE file.SIf the file is an installer, the installation wizard begins. Follow the di-rections on the screen. Once the software is installed, the installer au-tomatically transfers the software to your 700 Color Computer.SIf the file is not an installer, an error message stating that the programis valid but it is designed for a different type of computer is displayed.Move this file to your 700 Color Computer. If you cannot find anyinstallation instructions for the program in the Read Me file or docu-mentation, use ActiveSync Explore to copy the program file to theProgram Files folder on your 700 Color Computer. For more infor-mation on copying files using ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help.Once installation is complete, tap Start >Programs, and then the programicon to switch to it.Adding a Program Directly from the Internet1Determine your 700 Color Computer and processor type so that youknow which version of the software to install. Tap Start >Settings >theSystem tab > About >theVersion tab, then make a note of theinformation in Processor.2Download the program to your 700 Color Computer straight from theInternet using Pocket Internet Explorer. You may see a single *.XIP,*.EXE, or *.ZIP file, a SETUP.EXE file, or several versions of files fordifferent 700 Color Computer types and processors. Be sure to selectthe program designed for the Windows Mobile and your 700 ColorComputer processor type.3Read program installation instructions, Read Me files, or other docu-mentation. Many programs provide installation instructions.4Tap the file, such as a *.XIP or *.EXE file to start the installation wi-zard. Follow the directions on the screen.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 243700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAdding a Program to the Start MenuTap Start >Settings >Menus >theStart Menu tab, and then the checkbox for the program. If you do not see the program listed, you can eitheruseFileExploreronthe700ColorComputertomovetheprogramtotheStart Menu folder, or use ActiveSync on the desktop to create a shortcutto the program and place the shortcut in the Start Menu folder.Using File Explorer on the 700 Color ComputerTap Start >Programs >File Explorer, and locate the program (tap thefolder list, labeled My Documents by default, and then My Device to see alist of all folders on the 700 Color Computer). Tap and hold the programand tap Cut on the pop-up menu. Open the Start Menu folder located inthe Windows folder, tap and hold a blank area of the window, and tapPaste on the pop-up menu. The program now appears on the Start menu.For more information on using File Explorer, see “Finding and OrganizingInformation” on page 40.Using ActiveSync on the desktopUse the Explorer in ActiveSync to explore your 700 Color Computer filesand locate the program. Right-click the program, and then click CreateShortcut. Move the shortcut to the Start Menu folder in the Windowsfolder. The shortcut now appears on the Start menu. For more informa-tion, see ActiveSync Help.Removing ProgramsTap Start >Settings >theSystem tab > Remove Programs.If the program does not appear in the list of installed programs, use FileExplorer on your 700 Color Computer to locate the program, tap andhold the program, and then tap Delete on the pop-up menu.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —244 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMicrosoft ActiveSyncVisit the following Microsoft Web site for the latest in updates, technicalinformation, and samples:http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/resources/communities/de-fault.mspxUsing Microsoft ActiveSync, you can synchronize the information on yourdesktop with the information on your 700 Color Computer. Synchroniza-tion compares the data on your 700 Color Computer with your desktopand updates both computers with the most recent information. For exam-ple:SKeep Pocket Outlook data up-to-date by synchronizing your 700 ColorComputer with Microsoft Outlook data on your desktop.SSynchronize Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel files between your700 Color Computer and desktop. Your files are automatically con-verted to the correct formatNote: By default, ActiveSync does not automatically synchronize all typesof information. Use ActiveSync options to turn synchronization on and offfor specific information types.With ActiveSync, you can also:SBack up and restore your 700 Color Computer data.SCopy (rather than synchronize) files between your 700 Color Computerand desktop.SControl when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronizationmode. For example, you can synchronize continually while connected toyour desktop or only when you choose the synchronize command.SSelect which information types are synchronized and control how muchdata is synchronized. For example, you can choose how many weeks ofpast appointments you want synchronized.Before you begin synchronization, install ActiveSync on your desktop fromthe Windows Mobile Companion CD. For more information on installingActiveSync, see your Quick Start card. ActiveSync is already installed onyour 700 Color Computer.After installation is complete, the ActiveSync Setup Wizard helps you con-nectyour700ColorComputertoyourdesktop,setupapartnershipsoyou can synchronize information between your 700 Color Computer andyour desktop, and customize your synchronization settings. Your first syn-chronization process automatically begins when finished using the wizard.After your first synchronization, look at Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks onyour 700 Color Computer. Notice that information you have stored inMicrosoft Outlook on your desktop was copied to your 700 Color Com-puter, and you did not have to type a word. Disconnect the 700 ColorComputer from your computer and you are ready to go!

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 245700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualOnce you have set up ActiveSync and completed the first synchronizationprocess, you can initiate synchronization from your 700 Color Computer.To switch to ActiveSync on your 700 Color Computer, tap Start >ActiveSync. Note that if you have a wireless LAN card, you cansynchronize remotely from your 700 Color Computer.For information about using ActiveSync on your desktop, start ActiveSyncon your desktop, and then see ActiveSync Help.Tap to synchronize via IR or changesynchronization settings.View connection status.Tap to connect and synchronize.Taptostopsynchronization.View synchronization status.For more information about ActiveSync on your 700 Color Computer,switch to ActiveSync, then tap Start >Help.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —246 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMicrosoft Pocket OutlookMicrosoft Pocket Outlook includes Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Inbox, andNotes. You can use these programs individually or together. For example,youcanusee-mailaddressesstoredinContactstoaddresse-mailmessagesin Inbox.Using ActiveSync, you can synchronize information in Microsoft Outlookor Microsoft Exchange on your desktop with your 700 Color Computer.You can also synchronize this information directly with a Microsoft Ex-change server. Each time you synchronize, ActiveSync compares thechanges you made on your 700 Color Computer and desktop or serverand updates both computers with the latest information. For informationon using ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop.You can switch to any program by tapping it on the Start menu.Calendar: Scheduling Appointments and MeetingsTo switch to Calendar on the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Calendar.Use Calendar to schedule appointments, including meetings and otherevents. You can check your appointments in one of several views (Day,Week, Month, Year, and Agenda) and set Calendar to remind you of ap-pointments with a sound or other method.Appointments for the day can display on the Today screen.If you use Outlook on your desktop, you can synchronize appointmentsbetween your device and desktop.Tap to create a new appointmentTaptogotoTodayTap to display or editthe appointment details.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 247700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSynchronizing CalendarCalendar items stored on your device can be synchronized with calendaritems on your desktop or Microsoft Exchange Server. (Note that you canonly synchronize information directly with an Exchange Server if yourcompany is running Microsoft Mobile Information Server 2002 or later.)Calendar synchronization is automatically selected in ActiveSync.Calendar items entered on one computer are copied to the other duringsynchronization. Handwritten notes and drawings are saved as metafiles(pictures).For more information on synchronization, see ActiveSync Help on thedesktop.Why Use Categories in the Calendar?Use categories to group related tasks, contacts, and appointments. Then,use these groupings to quickly display only the information you want. Forexample, you can easily share your device with another by assigning yourappointments to a category with a special project’s name. You can then usethis category to filter Calendar and only display appointments for thatproject.Note: In Month View, the day of an appointment assigned to the Holidaycategory appears in red.TaptoaccesstheMonthviewThis day was assignedthe Holiday category.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —248 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWhat’s an All Day Event?An appointment can either be a normal appointment or an all day event,which lasts the full day or spans many days. Examples include a tradeshow, a vacation, or a seminar. You can also use all day events to schedulean annual event, such as a birthday or anniversary. In this case, change theStatus box to Free (you may need to scroll to see it) so that it does notshow time as busy in your calendar. All day events do not occupy blocks oftime in Calendar; they appear in banners at the top of the calendar.Note: You cannot modify or create all day events with attendees on thedevice. If you create all day events with attendees on your desktop, use Ac-tiveSync to copy such events to the device. Then, view them in Calendar.For more information on copying files, see ActiveSync Help.Tousethedevice to schedule an appointment with attendees lasting all day, set typeto “Normal,” then adjust the date and time appropriately.Tap to access the Day viewThis describes the allday event.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 249700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWhat’s a Recurrence Pattern?If you have an appointment or task that you do on a regular basis, such asa weekly team meeting or a monthly status report, enter the item once andset a recurrence pattern for it. If the default patterns in the list are notwhat you need, you can create your own pattern using the wizard.Select your recurrencepattern from this drop-down list.Select <Edit pattern...>to access the wizardwith which to custom-ize your recurrence.Viewing AppointmentsYou can view appointments in one of several views (Agenda, Day, Week,and Month). In Agenda view, upcoming appointments are displayed inbold. To see detailed appointment information in any view, tap the ap-pointment. To see a list of available actions for an appointment, tap andhold the appointment.Tap to access the Agenda viewThis displays the ap-pointment in bold.Note:TapStart >Today to quickly see your appointments for the day.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —250 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMonth view displays symbols to indicate the types of appointments youhave on a given day. An upward triangle indicates a morning appointment;a downward triangle indicates an afternoon appointment. If you have ap-pointments in the morning and afternoon, a solid square is displayed. Ifyou have an all day event not marked Free, a hollow square is displayed.TaptoaccesstheMonthviewThis displays an all dayevent not marked Free.This displays a morn-ing appointment.This displays appoint-ments in both morningand afternoon.This displays an after-noon appointment.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 251700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCreating or Changing an AppointmentTo create an appointment, tap New. To select a new date from a pop-upcalendar, tap the display date. To enter or select a new time, tap the dis-play time. Enter the appointment details, and when finished, tap OK toreturn to the calendar.IfyouareworkinginDayview,tapthetimeslotforthenewappointmentand then tap New to have the time automatically entered for you.To change an appointment, tap it in the calendar, and then tap Edit.Change any appointment detail by tapping it and entering the new infor-mation.Note: Tap the arrows to the right of the description and location boxes tochoose from previous entries.When entering a time, you can type military and abbreviated time forms,such as 2300 (becomes 11:00 PM), 913pm (becomes 9:13 PM), 911 (be-comes 9:11 AM), and 9p (becomes 9:00 PM).Tap to return to the calendar(the appointment is savedautomatically).Tap to choose frompredefined text.Tap to choose from previouslyentered locations.Taptoselectatime.Tap to select a date.Notes is a good place formaps and directions.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —252 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCreating an All Day EventTo create an all day event, do the following:1Tap New.2Tap All Day, then select Yes.Tap to select eitherYes or No whetherthis is an all dayevent.Note: To change an all day event, switch to Day or Agenda view, tap theevent listed at the top of the calendar, and then tap Edit. Change any ap-pointment detail by tapping it and entering the new information.You cannot modify or create all day events with attendees on the 700 Col-or Computer. If you create all day events with attendees on your desktop,use ActiveSync to copy such events to the 700 Color Computer. Then,view them in Calendar. For more information on copying files, see Active-Sync Help. To use the device to schedule an appointment with attendeeslasting all day, set type to Normal, then adjust date and time accordingly.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 253700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSetting a Reminder for an AppointmentDo the following to set a reminder for an appointment in the calendar:1Tap the appointment, then tap Edit to change the appointment.2Tap Reminder and select Remind me.3To change how many minutes before the appointment you are re-minded, tap the minutes displayed, then select the new minutes from adrop-down or enter the new minutes.Tap minutes to change hours, days, or weeks.TaptoselectRemind meto enable the reminderfeature.Note: To automatically set a reminder for all new appointments, in thecalendar, tap Tools >Options, select Set reminders for new items,thentap the number and timeframe options to change the information given.Tap this to set remindersfor new appointmentsautomatically.To choose how you are reminded, for example by a sound, Tap Start >Settings >thePersonal tab>theSounds & Notifications icon.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —254 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAdding a Note to an AppointmentYou can add written or typed notes and even recordings (if your devicesupports recordings) to an appointment. This is a good place for maps,drawings, and other detailed information.1In the calendar, tap the appointment, then tap Edit.2Tap the Notes tab to enter notes. For specific instructions, tap Start >Help >Notes to see Notes Help.Tap to activate the writing pad.These are controls forthe recorder.Use your stylus to writeor draw your informa-tion here.Tap to activate the recorder.Tap to activate the keyboard.Note: To edit an existing note, tap the appointment in the calendar, tapEdit,thentaptheNotes tab.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 255700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMaking an Appointment RecurringDo the following to make a recurring appointment:1In the calendar, tap the appointment, then tap Edit2Tap Occurs and select a pattern from the list. Or, to create a new pat-tern, tap <Edit pattern...>, and follow the steps in the wizard.Select your recurrencepattern from this drop-down list.Select <Edit pattern...>to access the wizardwithwhichtocustom-ize your recurrence.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —256 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAssigning an Appointment to a Category1In the calendar, tap the appointment, then tap Edit.2Tap Categories.3On the Select tab, select the categories to which you want to assign theappointment.4To create a new category, tap the Add/Delete tab, enter the categoryname, then tap Add. The new category is automatically selected in theSelect tab.5Tap ok to return to the appointment.A check mark indicatesa selected category.Note: To find an appointment assigned to a category, tap Tools >Catego-ries and select the type of appointment that you want displayed. To showall appointments again, tap Tools >Categories and clear all categories.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 257700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSending a Meeting RequestUse Calendar to schedule meetings with people who use Outlook or Pock-et Outlook. When attendees receive a meeting request, they can accept ordecline the meeting. If they accept, the meeting is automatically added totheir schedule. In addition, their response is sent back to you, and yourcalendar is updated.Before you can send a meeting request, you must enter e-mail addresses inContacts Help and set up Inbox to send and receive messages. For moreinformation on sending and receiving meeting requests, tap Start >Help >Calendar to see Calendar Help,andtapStart >Help >Inbox to see InboxHelp.1Tap New, then enter the meeting information.2Hide the onscreen keyboard, if needed, then tap Attendees.Onlythosecontacts with e-mail addresses are displayed. Select the contacts youwant to invite, then tap ok to return to the appointment.3Select other desired options and then tap ok.4Inbox automatically creates a meeting request and sends it to the atten-dees the next time you synchronize with your desktop. Textual notesentered in the Notes tab (excluding writing or recordings) are sent also.A check mark indicatesa selected attendee.Note: If you are sending the meeting request through a connection to anISP or the network, rather than through synchronization with your desk-top, tap Tools >Options.FromtheSend meeting requests via drop-downlist, tap the service to use to send the meeting request.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —258 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualFinding an AppointmentThere are two ways to find an appointment:STap Start >Find, enter the appointment name, tap the Type arrow andselect Calendar from the drop-down list, and then tap Go.SIn the calendar, tap Tools >Categories and select the type of appoint-ment you want displayed. To show all appointments again, tap Tools >Categories and clear all categories.Tap this to select from a drop-downlist or enter a phrase.Tap this for a drop-down list ofareas where to search this phrase.Tap this to see its details.Note: In Find, you can tap the Find arrow to select from a list of items ofpreviously searched items or phrases.Deleting an Appointment1In the calendar, tap and hold the appointment.2On the pop-up menu, tap Delete Appointment.Thenexttimeyousynchronize, the appointment is also deleted from the desktop.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 259700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualChanging Calendar OptionsIn the calendar, tap Tools >Options.STo see appointment indicators, select icons to display in Show icons.You can choose to display indicators for such things as recurring ap-pointments, appointments with notes, and appointments with remind-ers. Tap and hold an icon to see its name.SIf you are having trouble reading the calendar, select Use large font.You may see less appointment information.Tap this to view larger text.Tap to indicate reminders.Tap to indicate recurrences.Tap to indicate notes.Tap to indicate locations.Tap to indicate attendees.Tap to indicate private.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —260 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualContacts: Tracking Friends and ColleaguesTo switch to Contacts on the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Contacts.Contacts maintains a list of your friends and colleagues so that you caneasily find the information you are looking for, whether you are at homeor on the road. You can enter both personal and business information.If you use Microsoft Outlook on your desktop, you can synchronizecontacts between your 700 Color Computer and your desktop.Tap and enter part of a nameto quickly find it in the list.Tap to create a new contact.Select the category of contacts youwant displayed in the list.Tap to see additional phonenumbers and e-mail addresses.Tap to display or edit thecontact details.Tap and hold to display apop-up menu of actions.Tap to toggle to By Company (note the Name view)

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 261700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCreating a Contact1Tap New.2Using the input panel, enter a name and other contact information.Scroll down to see all available fields.3To assign the contact to a category, scroll to and tap Categories and se-lect a category from the list. In the contact list, you can display contactsby category.4To add notes, tap the Notes tab. You can enter text, draw, or create arecording. For more information on creating notes, see “Notes: Captur-ing Thoughts and Ideas”onpage71.5When finished, tap OK to return to the contact list.Tap to return to the contact list (thecontact is saved automatically).Scroll to see more fields.Notes is a good place formaps and directions.Synchronizing ContactsContacts stored on your device can be synchronized with Outlook contactsstored on your desktop or with Mobile Information Server 2002 or later.New items entered in one location are copied to the other during synchro-nization. Handwritten notes and drawings are saved as pictures when syn-chronizing with your desktop, but are removed when synchronizing with aserver.For more information on synchronization, see ActiveSync Help on thedesktop.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —262 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualViewing ContactsThe contact list displays the contact name and the first primary phonenumber or e-mail address specified for that contact. Contacts are orderedby name of contact or company.STap the default letter (home, work, mobile, or e-mail) to the right ofthe contact to see additional phone numbers and e-mail addresses.SSelect a contact and press the Left/Right controls to change the defaultnumber, displayed as a letter to the right of the contact name.STo see more contact information, tap the contact.STo see a list of available actions for a contact via a pop-up menu, tapandholdthecontact.STo see a list of contacts employed by a specific company, tap View >ByCompany. Then, tap the desired company name.Note: You can change the appearance of the contact list by tapping Tools>Options.Tap for a list of phone num-bers and e-mail addresses.Tap to toggle By Name and By Company views.Indicates the default number.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 263700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCreating or Changing a ContactSTo create a contact, tap New. To enter notes, tap the Notes tab. Whenfinished, tap ok to return to the contact list.STo change a contact, tap it in the contact list, and then tap Edit.Tocancel edits, tap Edit >Undo. When finished making changes, tap ok toreturn to the contact list.Note: Ifyouenteranamewithmorethantwowords,themiddlewordis recorded as a middle name. If your contact has a double first or lastname, tap the Name arrow and enter the names in the proper box.Tap to access the Namefields.Tap anywhere outside the boxto close and return to details.Note: New contacts are added to the displayed category.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —264 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAdding a Note to a ContactYou can add written or typed notes and even recordings (if your devicesupports recordings) to a contact. Notes are handy for maps and drawings.1In the contact list, tap the contact.2Tap the Notes tab. For specific instructions, tap Start >Help >Notesto see Notes Help.Tap to activate the writing pad.These are controls forthe recorder.Use your stylus to writeor draw your informa-tion here.Tap to activate the recorder.Tap to activate the keyboard.Note: To edit an existing note, tap the contact, tap Edit,thentaptheNotes tab.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 265700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAssigning a Contact to a Category1In the contact list, tap the contact, and then tap Edit.2Scroll to and tap Categories.3On the Select tab, select the categories to which you want to assign thecontact.4To create a new category, tap the Add/Delete tab, enter the categoryname, then tap Add. The new category is automatically selected in theSelect tab.5Tap ok to return to the contacts.A check mark indicatesa selected category.Copying a Contact1In the contact list, select the contact. To select multiple contacts, tapand drag.2Tap Tools,andthenselectCopy Contacts.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —266 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSending a Message to a Contact1In the contact list, tap and hold the contact. To select multiple contacts,tap and drag. Then, tap and hold the selected contacts.2On the pop-up menu, select Send Email or Send SMS, dependingupon the type of message to send.Note: To send an e-mail message, you must have an e-mail address config-ured for the contact. To send an SMS (Short Messaging Service) message,you must have an SMS number for the contact, which is usually the mo-bile phone number.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 267700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualFinding a ContactThere are four ways to find a contact:STap Start >Find, enter the contact name (first, last, or middle), phonenumber, or address, select Contacts for the type, then tap Go.SFrom Contacts, start typing a contact name until you see it displayed onthe screen. To show all contacts again, tap the text box at the top of thescreen and clear the text, or tap the arrow to the right of the text box.SIn the contact list, tap the category list (labeled All Contacts by default)and tap the category to which you have assigned a contact. To show allcontacts again, select All Contacts.STo view the names of companies for which your contacts work, in thecontact list, tap View >By Company. The number of contacts thatwork for that company is displayed to the right of the company name.Note: To quickly move through a long list of contacts, tap one of the setsof letters displayed at the top of the contact list. This takes you to the con-tact names beginning with those letters.Taptojumptothatpor-tion of the contacts list.Enter the first few letters ofthe contact in question here.Tap to toggle to By Name (note the Company view)Deleting a Contact1In the contact list, tap and hold the contact. To select multiple contacts,tap and drag. Then, tap and hold the selected contacts.2On the pop-up menu, tap Delete Contact. The next time you synchro-nize, the contact is deleted from the desktop also.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —268 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAdding a Contact to Speed DialYou can create speed dials to call frequently-called numbers with a singletap. Before you can create a speed dial entry for a phone number, thatnumber must already exist in Contacts.1From the Phone keypad, tap Speed Dial >New.2Tapthedesiredcontactnameandnumber.3In the Location field, tap the Up/Down arrows to select an availablelocation to assign as the new speed dial entry. The first speed dial loca-tion is reserved for your voice mail.To delete a speed dial entry, go to the Speed Dial list, tap and hold thecontact name in the box to the right of the assigned speed dial number,then tap Delete.Changing Contacts OptionsIn the contact list, tap Tools >Options.SThe area code and country/region for new contacts are automaticallyentered based on the information in Country/Region settings.SIf you are having trouble reading the contacts in the contact list, selectUse large font.STo increase the available space for displaying contacts in the list, clearShow ABC tabs.Enter the three-digit area code.Select from a drop-down list.Tap this to view larger text.Clear this to view morecontacts per screen.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 269700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTasks: Keeping a To Do ListTo switch to Tasks on your 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Tasks.Use Tasks to keep track of what you have to do. A variety of task informa-tion can display on the Today screen. If you use Microsoft Outlook onyour desktop, you can synchronize tasks between your device and desktop.Select the sort order of the list.Taptocreateanewtask.Use this entry bar to assign a task quickly.Tap to display or edit thetask details.Tap and hold to display apop-up menu of actions.Select the category of tasks you want displayed in the list.Indicates a high priority.Note: To change the way information is displayed in the list, tap Tools >Options.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —270 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCreating a TaskSTo quickly create a task, enter text in the Tap here to add a new taskbox at the top of the screen. If you do not see this box, tap Tools >Entry Bar.STo create a task with detailed information, such as start and due dates,tap New. To enter notes, tap the Notes tab.You can enter a start date and due date or enter other information byfirst tapping the field. If the input panel is open, you need to hide it tosee all available fields.You can enter text, draw, or create a recording. For more informationon creating notes, see “Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas” on page 71.STo change a task, tap it in the task list, and then tap Edit.SUsing the onscreen keyboard, enter a description.STo assign the task to a category, tap Categories and select a categoryfrom the list. In the task list, you can display tasks by category.SWhen finished, tap ok to return to the task list.Taptoreturntothetasklist(thetask is saved automatically).Tap to choose from predefinedsubjects.Notes is a good place formaps and drawings.Note: To quickly create a task with only a subject, tap Entry Bar on theTools menu. Then, tap Tap here to add a new task and enter your taskinformation.Synchronizing TasksTasks stored on your 700 Color Computer can synchronize with Micro-soft Outlook on your desktop. Task synchronization is automatically se-lected in ActiveSync.New items entered on one computer are copied to the other during syn-chronization. Handwritten notes and drawings are saved as metafiles (pic-tures).For more information on synchronization, see ActiveSync Help on thedesktop.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 271700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNotes: Capturing Thoughts and IdeasTo switch to Notes on your 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Notes.Notes helps you quickly capture your ideas, notes, and thoughts. You cancreate a note using written and typed text, drawings, and recordings. Youcan also share your notes with others through e-mail, infrared, and syn-chronization with your desktop.Tap to change the sortorder of the list.Tap to create a new item.Taptoopenanoteorplay a recording.Tap and hold to display apop-up menu of actions.Tap to record.Tap to show or hide the Recording toolbar.Note: To create documents with advanced formatting or templates, suchasbulletedlistsandtabs,usewordprocessingsoftwaredevelopedforyourdevice, such as Pocket Word.Creating a NoteTo create your note, tap New,thenwrite,draw,type,orrecordyourin-formation. For information about using the input panel, writing and dra-wing, and creating recordings, see “Basic Skills” on page 26.SWritingUsing the stylus, write directly on the screen.SDrawingUsing the stylus, draw directly on the screen.STypingUsing the input panel, enter typed text into the 700 Color Computer.Do this by tapping keys on the onscreen keyboard or by using hand-writing recognition software.SRecordingCreate a stand-alone recording or embed a recording into a note.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —272 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSynchronizing NotesNotes can be synchronized between your desktop and device eitherthrough notes synchronization or file synchronization. Notes synchroniza-tion synchronizes the notes on your 700 Color Computer with OutlookNotes on your desktop. File synchronization synchronizes all notes onyour700ColorComputerwiththeMyDocumentsfolderforthe700ColorComputeronyourdesktop.To synchronize your notes through notes synchronization, first select theNotes information type for synchronization in ActiveSync. The next timeyou synchronize, all notes in My Documents and its subfolder on yourdevice appear in Outlook Notes on your desktop. Notes that contain onlytext appear as regular notes in Outlook on your desktop, while notes con-taining written text or drawings appear in the device format. In addition,all notes in the Notes group in Outlook on the desktop appear in Notes onthe device.To synchronize your notes as files, in ActiveSync, select the Files informa-tion type for synchronization and clear the Notes information type. Whenyou select Files, the My Documents folder for the 700 Color Computer iscreated on your desktop. All .PWI files placed in the My Documents fold-er on your device and all .DOC files placed in the My Documents folderforthe700ColorComputeronyourdesktoparesynchronized.Password-protected files cannot be synchronized.ActiveSync converts documents during synchronization. For more infor-mation on synchronization or file conversion, see ActiveSync Help on thedesktop.Note: When you delete or change an item on either your desktop or 700Color Computer, the item is changed or deleted in the other location thenext time you synchronize.Note: If you synchronize your notes using file synchronization and thenlater decide to use notes synchronization, all of your notes are synchro-nized with Outlook on your desktop and no longer store in the My Docu-ments folder for the 700 Color Computer.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 273700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualInbox: Sending and Receiving E-mail MessagesTo switch to Inbox on your 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Inbox.You can receive Internet e-mail messages and SMS messages in Inbox. In-ternet e-mail messages are sent by using an address you receive from yourInternet service provider (ISP) or your employer. SMS messages are sentand received through your wireless phone service provider by using aphone number as the message address.You can send and receive e-mail by synchronizing with your desktop, orby connecting to a Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3) or Internet Message Ac-cess Protocol 4 (IMAP4) mail server. You need to set up an e-mail accountfor each method that you use except for Microsoft ActiveSync, which is setupbydefault.TheActiveSyncfolderonyour700ColorComputerstoresmessages that you send and receive through synchronization with a desk-top. Account names appear as folders in the folder list (located on the left,under the navigation bar) in the Inbox message list.With synchronization, messages are synchronized between the device In-box and the PC Inbox by using ActiveSync and Microsoft Exchange orMicrosoft Outlook. For more information, see “Synchronizing E-mail Mes-sages”below.When connecting to a POP3 or IMAP4 server, you use a modem to con-nect to your Internet service provider (ISP), or a modem or Ethernet cardto connect to the local area network to which your e-mail server is connec-ted. You can also use your phone to connect by using a cellular line con-nection. For more information, see “Connecting to a Mail Server”onpage75.Synchronizing E-mail MessagesAfter selecting Inbox for synchronization in ActiveSync, e-mail messagesare synchronized as part of the general synchronization process. Duringsynchronization:SMessages are copied from the Inbox folder on your desktop or theMicrosoft Exchange server to the Inbox folder on your 700 Color Com-puter. (Note that you can only synchronize information directly with anExchange Server if your company is running Microsoft Mobile Infor-mation Server 2002 or later.) By default, you receive messages from thelast three days only, the first 100 lines of each new message, and file at-tachmentsoflessthan100KBinsize.SMessages in the Outbox folder on your device are transferred to Ex-change or Outlook and then sent from those programs.SThe messages on the two computers are linked. When you delete a mes-sage on your 700 Color Computer, it is deleted from your desktop thenext time you synchronize.SMessages in subfolders in other e-mail folders in Outlook are synchro-nized only if they were selected for synchronization in ActiveSync.For information on initiating Inbox synchronization or changing synchro-nization settings, see ActiveSync Help on your desktop or select Start >Help >Connections to see Connections Help.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —274 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualManaging E-mail Messages and FoldersEach e-mail account and SMS account has its own folder hierarchy withfivedefaultfolders:Inbox,Outbox,DeletedItems,Drafts,andSentItems.The messages you receive and send through the mail account are stored inthese folders. You can also create additional folders within each hierarchy.The Deleted Items folder contains messages that were deleted on the de-vice. The behavior of the Deleted Items and Sent Items folders depends onthe Inbox options you have chosen.The behavior of the folders you create depends on whether you are usingActiveSync,SMS,POP3,orIMAP4.SIf you use ActiveSync,e-mail messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook automatically synchro-nize with your device. You can select to synchronize additional foldersby designating them for ActiveSync. The folders you create and themessages you move are then mirrored on the server. For example, if youmovetwomessagesfromtheInboxfoldertoafoldernamedFamily,and you have designated Family for synchronization, the server creates acopy of the Family folder and copies the messages into that folder. Youcan then read the messages while away from your desktop.SIf you use SMS,messages are stored in the Inbox folder.SIf you use POP3and you move e-mail messages to a folder you created, the link is brokenbetween the messages on the device and their copies on the mail server.The next time you connect, the mail server sees that the messages aremissing from the device Inbox and deletes them from the server. Thisprevents you from having duplicate copies of a message, but it alsomeans that you no longer have access to messages that you move to fold-ers created from anywhere except the 700 Color Computer.SIf you use IMAP4,the folders you create and the e-mail messages you move are mirroredon the server. Therefore, messages are available to you anytime you con-nect to your mail server, whether it is from your 700 Color Computeror desktop. This synchronization of folders occurs whenever you con-nect to your mail server, create new folders, or rename or delete folderswhen connected.For all accounts except ActiveSync, you can access folder options by tap-ping Tools >Manage Folders.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 275700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualConnecting to a Mail ServerIn addition to synchronizing e-mail messages with your desktop, you cansend and receive e-mail messages by connecting to an e-mail server using amodem or network card connected to your 700 Color Computer. Youneed to set up a remote connection to a network or an ISP, and a connec-tion to your e-mail server. For more information, see “Getting Connected”on page 98.When you connect to the e-mail server, new messages are downloaded tothe 700 Color Computer Inbox folder, messages in the 700 Color Com-puter Outbox folder are sent, and messages that were deleted on the e-mailserver are removed from the 700 Color Computer Inbox folder.Messages that you receive directly from an e-mail server are linked to youre-mail server rather than your desktop. When you delete a message onyour 700 Color Computer, it is also deleted from the e-mail server thenext time you connect based on the settings selected in ActiveSync.You can work online or offline. When working online, you read and re-spond to messages while connected to the e-mail server. Messages are sentas soon as you tap Send, which saves space on your 700 Color Computer.When working offline, once you have downloaded new message headers orpartial messages, you can disconnect from the e-mail server and then de-cide which messages to download completely. The next time you connect,Inbox downloads the complete messages you have marked for retrieval andsends the messages you have composed.Setting Up or Changing an AccountTo set up an account:STo set up a POP3 or IMAP4 e-mail account, tap Accounts >New Ac-count. Follow the instructions in the New Account Wizard.STo set up an SMS account, tap Accounts >Accounts, and then tapSMS. Follow the instructions on the screen.To change options for an account:1Tap Accounts >Accounts.2Tap the name of the account, and follow the instructions on the screen.To delete an account:1Tap Accounts >Accounts.2Tap and hold the name of the account, and then tap Delete.Note: You can set up several e-mail accounts including your ActiveSyncaccount, but you can set up only one SMS account.Note: You cannot add a new account while connected. Tap Accounts >Disconnect to disconnect.Note: You cannot delete your SMS account.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —276 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualDownloading Messages from the ServerIn Inbox, tap Accounts >Connect to open a connection to the Internet oryour corporate network, depending on the account. For more information,tap Start >Help >Connections to see Connections Help.1Tap Accounts and ensure that the account you want to use is selected(marked by a bullet.)2Tap Connect.Themessagesonyour700ColorComputerande-mailserver are synchronized: new messages are downloaded to the 700 ColorInbox folder, messages in the 700 Color Outbox folder are sent, andmessages that were deleted from the server are removed from the 700Color Inbox. Tap a message in the message list to open it.3If you read a message and decide that you need the full copy, tap Edit >Mark for Download while in the message window. If you are in themessage list, tap and hold the message, and then tap Mark for Down-load. This also downloads message attachments if you selected those op-tions when you set up the e-mail account. You can also choose to down-load full copies of messages by default.4When finished, tap Accounts >Disconnect.Note: Receiving entire messages consumes storage memory.Note: The size column in the message list displays the local size and serversize of a message. Even when a message has downloaded fully, these num-bers may differ because the size of a message can vary between the serverand the device.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 277700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualComposing and Sending MessagesTo compose a message:1In the message list, tap New.2To select an account, tap the From list and select “ActiveSync,” “SMS,”or the desired e-mail account.3Enter the e-mail address or SMS address of one or more recipients, sepa-rating them with semicolons. To access addresses and phone numbersfrom Contacts, tap To.4Enter your message. To quickly add common messages, tap My Textand tap a desired message.5To check spelling, tap Edit >Spell Check.6Tap Send. If you are working offline, the message is moved to the Out-box folder and is sent the next time you connect.Tap to show or hide thecomplete header.Tap to show or hide the recording tool bar.Tap to display the Address Book.Tap to insert common (preset) messages.Note: If you are sending an SMS message and want to know if it was re-ceived, before sending the message, tap Edit >Options >Request SMStext message delivery notification.You can directly call the sender of an SMS message by tapping the iconshown to the left, then Call.Note: Depending on the e-mail address options that you select, you canuse a directory service in addition to your contact list to verify names.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —278 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCompanion ProgramsThe companion programs consist of Microsoft Pocket Word, MicrosoftPocket Excel, Windows Media Player, and Microsoft Reader. To switch toa companion program on your 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Programs, then tap the program name.Pocket WordPocket Word works with Microsoft Word on your desktop to give youaccess to copies of your documents. You can create new documents onyour 700 Color Computer, or you can copy documents from your desktopto your 700 Color Computer. Synchronize documents between your desk-top and your 700 Color Computer to have up-to-date content in bothlocations.Creating a DocumentUse Pocket Word to create documents, such as letters or meeting minutes.To create a new file, tap Start >Programs >Pocket Word >New.Yougeteither a blank document or a template, depending on what you have se-lected in the Tools >Options dialog box. Select an input mode from theView menu.You can open only one document at a time; when you open a second doc-ument, you have to save the first. You can save a document you create oredit in formats such as Word (.DOC), Pocket Word (.PSW), Rich TextFormat (.RTF), and Plain Text (.TXT).Pocket Word contains a list of files stored on your 700 Color Computer.Tap a file in the list to open it. To delete, make copies of, and send files,tap and hold a file in the list, then, select the action on the pop-up menu.Tap to change the sortorder of the list.Tap to create a new document.Tap to open a document.Tap and hold an item tosee a pop-up menu ofactions.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 279700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualYou can enter information in Pocket Word in one of four modes (typing,writing, recording, and drawing), which are displayed on the View menu.Each mode has its own toolbar, which you can show and hide by tappingthe Show/Hide Toolbar buttononthecommandbar.You can change the zoom magnification by tapping View >Zoom,thenselect the percentage you want. Select a higher percentage to enter text anda lower one to see more of your document.If you are opening a Word document created on a desktop, you may selectView >Wrap to Window so that you can see the entire document.To check spelling, select text, then tap Tools >Spell Check.Touseyournew document as a template, move the document to the Templates folder.You can insert the data in a document. First, make sure that no drawingsare selected, tap and hold anywhere on the document, then tap InsertDate from the pop-up menu.Typing ModeUsing the input panel, enter typed text into the document. For more in-formation on entering typed text, see “Basic Skills” on page 26.To format existing text and to edit text, first select the text. You can selecttext as you do in a Word document, using your stylus instead of the mouseto drag through the text you want to select. You can search a document tofind text by tapping Edit >Find/Replace.Tap to show or hide the toolbar.Tap to change formattingoptions.Taptoformattext.Taptoreturntothedocument list (changes aresaved automatically).Tap and hold to see a pop-up menu of actions.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —280 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWriting ModeIn writing mode, use your stylus to write directly on the screen. Ruledlines are displayed as a guide, and the zoom magnification is greater thanin typing mode to allow you to write more easily. For more informationon writing and selecting writing, see “Basic Skills” on page 26.Tap to select formatting options, such aspen weight and line color.With Space button selected,drag to insert space. An arrowappears showing the spacedirection and size.Tap to highlight selected text.Space button.Pen button.Note: If you cross three ruled lines in a single stylus stroke, the writingbecomes a drawing, and can be edited and manipulated as described in“Drawing Mode”onthenextpage.Note: Written words are converted to graphics (metafiles) when a PocketWord document is converted to a Word document on your desktop.Recording ModeIn recording mode, embed a recording into your document. Recordingsare saved as .WAV files. For more information on recording, see “BasicSkills” on page 26.For more information on using Pocket Word, tap Start >Help >PocketWord to see Pocket Word Help.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 281700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualDrawing ModeIn drawing mode, use your stylus to draw on the screen. Grid lines appearas a guide. When you lift your stylus off the screen after the first stroke, adrawing box indicating the boundaries of the drawing appears. Every sub-sequent stroke within or touching the drawing box becomes part of thedrawing. For more information on drawing and selecting drawings, see“Basic Skills” on page 26.Tap to select formatting options, such asline weight, fill color, and line color.Resize an object by draggingthe selection handles.Tap an arrow to see your choices.Pen button.Synchronizing Pocket Word DocumentsPocket Word documents can be synchronized with Word documents onyour desktop. To synchronize files, first select the Files information typefor synchronization in ActiveSync. When you select Files, the My Docu-ments folder for the 700 Color Computer is created on your desktop.Place all files you want to synchronize with the device in this folder. Pass-word-protected files cannot be synchronized.All Pocket Word files stored in My Documents and its subfolders are syn-chronized with the desktop. ActiveSync converts documents during syn-chronization.For more information on synchronization or file conversion, see ActiveSyncHelp on the desktop.Note: When you delete a file on either your desktop or your 700 ColorComputer, the file is deleted in the other location the next time you syn-chronize.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —282 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPocket ExcelYou can create and edit workbooks and templates in Microsoft Pocket Ex-cel as you do in Microsoft Excel on your desktop. Pocket Excel workbooksare usually saved as .PXL files, but you can also save them in .XLS format.When you close a workbook, it is automatically named and placed in thePocket Excel workbook list. You can attach a password to a workbook tohelp ensure privacy.Creating a WorkbookUse Pocket Excel to create workbooks, such as expense reports and mileagelogs. To create a new file, tap Start >Programs >Pocket Excel >New.Ablank workbook appears. Or, if you have selected a template for newworkbooks in the Tools >Options dialog box, that template appears withappropriate text and formatting already provided. You can open only oneworkbook at a time; when you open a second workbook, save the first.You can save a workbook you create or edit in a variety of formats,including Pocket Excel (.PXL) and Excel (.XLS). You can also save aworkbook as a template by moving the workbook to the Templates folder.Pocket Excel contains a list of the files stored on your 700 Color Comput-er. Tap a file in the list to open it. To delete, make copies of, and sendfiles, tap and hold a file in the list. Then select the appropriate action fromthe pop-up menu.Pocket Excel provides fundamental spreadsheet tools, such as formulas,functions, sorting, and filtering. To display the toolbar, tap View >Toolbar.Zoom button.Format button.AutoSum button.Cell contents appearhere as you enter them.Note: If your workbook contains sensitive information, you can protect itwith a password. To do so, open the workbook, tap Edit >Password.Ev-ery time you open the workbook, enter a password, preferably one that iseasy for you to remember but hard for others to guess.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 283700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTips for Working in Pocket ExcelNote the following when working in large worksheets in Pocket Excel:SView in full-screen mode to see as much of your worksheet as possible.Tap View >Full Screen.Toexitfull-screenmode,tapRestore.STap View >Zoom and select a percentage so that you can easily readthe worksheet.SShow and hide window elements. Tap View and then tap the elementsyou want to show or hide.SFreeze panes on a worksheet. First select the cell where you want tofreeze panes. Tap View >Freeze Panes.Youmightwanttofreezethetop and leftmost panes in a worksheet to keep row and column labelsvisible as you scroll through a sheet. Tap View >Unfreeze Panes toundo this process.SSplit panes to view different areas of a large worksheet. Tap View >Split. Then drag the split bar to where you want it. To remove the split,tap View >Remove Split.SShow and hide rows. To hide a row, select a cell in the row you want tohide. Then tap Format >Row >Hide. To show a hidden row, tapTools >Go To, and then type a reference that is in the hidden row.Then tap Format >Row >Unhide.SDo the same to show and hide columns. To hide a column, select a cellin the column you want to hide. Then tap Format >Column >Hide.To show a hidden column, tap Tools >Go To, and then type a refer-ence that is in the hidden column. Then tap Format >Column >Un-hide.For more information on using Pocket Excel, tap Start >Help >PocketExcel to see Pocket Excel Help.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —284 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMSN MessengerMSN Messenger on your 700 Color Computer provides the same chatenvironment as MSN Messenger on your desktop. These features include:SSeeing who is onlineSSending and receiving instant messagesSHaving an instant message conversation with a group of contactsSTelling contacts that you are unavailableSBlocking contacts from seeing your status or sending you messagesTo use MSN Messenger, you need a Microsoft Passport account, or aMicrosoft Exchange e-mail account that your employer provides. Onceyouhaveoneoftheseaccounts,dothefollowing:1Set up a connection on your 700 Color Computer, such as a modem orwireless connection, that enables you to connect to the Internet.2SetupanaccountinMSNMessenger.3Sign in to MSN Messenger.Note: To set up a free Hotmail account, go to http://www.hotmail.com.To set up a Microsoft Passport account, go to http://www.passport.com.To set up an Exchange account, see your network administrator.For more information on using MSN Messenger, tap Start >Help >MSNMessenger to see MSN Messenger Help.To switch to MSN Messenger, tap Start >Programs >MSN Messenger.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 285700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSetting Up an AccountBefore you can use MSN Messenger, you must set up the instant messag-ing accounts to use. For MSN Messenger Service, you must have a Micro-soft Passport or Hotmail account. For Exchange Instant Messaging, youmust have an Exchange account.1Create a connection for your device. To use MSN Messenger Service,set up a connection to the Internet; to use Exchange Instant Messaging,set up a connection to your corporate network. See page 98 for moreinformation on getting connected.2In MSN Messenger, tap Tools >Options >theAccounts tab.3Select Enable MSN Messenger Service or Enable Exchange Instant Mes-saging.4Enter your sign-in name and password for the selected accounts. Yoursign-in name is usually in the username@domain.com form.5If you selected both accounts, under Sign in using this account first, se-lect which account to sign in to first.Signing In and OutSTo sign in, tap anywhere on the screen. Follow the directions on thescreen.STo sign out, tap Tools >Sign Out.STo sign in upon connecting, tap Tools >Options >General and selectthe Run this program upon connection box.SSigning in to an Exchange account may take several minutes dependingupon your connection speed. Reducing the number of Exchange con-tacts decreases your sign-in time.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —286 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWorking with ContactsThe MSN Messenger window shows all of your messenger contacts at aglance, divided into Online and Not Online categories. From this view,while connected, you can chat, send e-mail, block the contact from chat-ting with you, or delete contacts from your list using the pop-up menu.Tap a contact to start achat.Tap and hold to display apop-up menu of actions.To add a contact, tap Tools >Add a Contact and follow the directions onthe screen.To delete a contact, tap and hold the contact’s name, then tap DeleteContact from the pop-up menu.To see others online without being seen, tap Tools >My Status >AppearOffline.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 287700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualManaging ContactsTo be alerted each time you are added to a contact list, tap Tools >Op-tions >thePrivacy tab.STo block a contact from seeing your status and sending you messages,tap the contact and tap the right arrow. This moves the contact to theMy Block List.STo unblock a contact, tap the contact and tap the left arrow. Thismoves the contact to the My Allow List.STo receive an alert when someone adds you to their contacts list, selectAlert me when I am added to a Passport contact list.STo see who has you listed as a contact, tap View.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —288 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSending a MessageSTap a contact to whom you want to send a message. Enter your messagein the text entry area at the bottom of the screen and tap Send.Toquickly add common messages, tap My Text and tap a desired message.STo invite another contact to an ongoing chat, tap Tools >Invite andtap a contact.STo see who is already chatting or to switch between chats, tap Chats.Enter a message.Tap to send message.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 289700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWindows Media Player for Windows MobileUse Microsoft Windows Media Player for Windows Mobile to play digitalaudio and video files that are stored on your 700 Series Computer or on anetwork.To switch to Windows Media Player on your 700 Color Computer, tapStart >Windows Media.Use Microsoft Windows Media Player on your desktop to copy digital au-dio and video files to your 700 Color Computer. You can play WindowsMedia and MP3 files on your Windows Mobile.Indicates the progressof the current track.Tap to adjust volume.Tap to skip to the next song.Tap to play a previous song.Taptostop.Tap to play or pause.For more information about using Windows Media Player for WindowsMobile, tap Start >Help >Windows Media Player to see Windows MediaPlayer Help.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —290 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMicrosoft ReaderUse Microsoft Reader to read eBooks on your 700 Color Computer.Download books to your desktop from your favorite eBook Web site.Then, use ActiveSync to copy the book files to your activated 700 ColorComputer. The books appear in the Reader Library, where you can tapthem in the list to open them. Each book consists of a cover page, an op-tional table of contents, and the pages of the book. You can:SPage through the book by using the Up/Down control on your 700ColorComputerorbytappingthepagenumberoneachpage.SAnnotate the book with highlighting, bookmarks, notes, and drawings.SSearch for text and look up definitions for words.The Guidebook contains all the information needed to use the software.To open the Guidebook, tap Help on the Reader command bar. Or, on abook page, tap and hold on the book title, and then tap Help on the pop-up menu.To switch to Microsoft Reader, tap Start >Programs >Microsoft Reader.Getting Books on Your 700 Color ComputerYou can download book files from the Web. Just visit your favorite eBookretailer and follow the instructions to download the book files.Sample books and a dictionary are also included in the MSReader folder inthe Extras folder on the Windows Mobile Companion CD.Use ActiveSync to download the files from your desktop to your activatedmobile computer as described in the Read Me file in the MSReader folder.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 291700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUsing the LibraryThe Library is your Reader home page; it displays a list of all books storedonyour700ColorComputerorstoragecard.ToopentheLibrary:1On the Reader command bar, tap Library.2On a book page, tap the book title, then tap Library on the pop-upmenu.3To open a book, tap its title in the Library list.Tap to scroll throughthe Library list.Tap to open a book.Tap here to navigate toother parts of the Reader.Tap to select a sort order.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —292 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualReading a BookEach book consists of a cover page, an optional table of contents, and thepages of the book. Navigation options are listed in the bottom portion ofthe cover page.Thefirsttimeyouopenabook,gotothefirstpageortothetableofcon-tents, if there is one. Subsequently, whenever you open the book, you areautomatically taken to the last page read.In addition to the text, each book page includes a page number and booktitle.Taptoselectanavigation option.Select an option afterdragging to select atext.Drag to select text.Tap arrows to turn thepage, or tap and holdpage number to bring uppage riffle.You can also page through a book by using the Up/Down/Left/Right con-trols on your 700 Color Computer.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 293700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUsing Reader FeaturesReading a book electronically gives you several options not available withpaper books. These options are available from any book page.Select text by dragging across the text on the page. Then, tap an option onthe pop-up menu, as described here:Searching for Text Find text in a book by tapping Find on the pop-up menu. Enter the word you want tosearch for, and tap the desired Find option. Reader highlights found text on the page. Toclose Find, tap outside the box. To return to your original page, tap the title and then tapReturn on the pop-up menu.Copying Text You can copy text from books that support this feature into any program that acceptstext. On a book page, select the text you want to copy. Then, tap Copy Text on the pop-up menu. The text can be pasted into the program of your choice.Adding Bookmarks When you add a bookmark to a book, a color-coded bookmark icon appears in the rightmargin. You can add multiple bookmarks to a book. Then, from anywhere in the book,tap the bookmark icon to go to the bookmarked page.Highlighting Text When you highlight text, it appears with a colored background.Attaching Notes to Text When you attach a note to text, you enter the text in a notepad that appears on top of thebook page. A Note icon displays in the left margin. To show or hide the note, tap theicon.Adding Drawings When you add a drawing, a Drawing icon appears in the bottom-left corner of the page,and drawing tools appear across the bottom of the page. Draw by dragging your stylus.Annotations Index To see a list of a book’s annotations, including bookmarks, highlights, text notes, anddrawings, tap Annotations Index on the book’s cover page. You can tap an entry in thelist to go to the annotated page.Removing a BookWhen you finish reading a book, you can delete it to conserve space onyour 700 Color Computer. If a copy of the book is stored on your desk-top, you can download it again at any time.To remove a book from your 700 Color Computer, tap and hold the titlein the Library list, and then tap Delete on the pop-up menu.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —294 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPocket Internet ExplorerUse Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer to view Web or WAP pages ineither of these ways:SDuring synchronization with your desktop, download your favoritelinks and mobile favorites that are stored in the Mobile Favorites sub-folder in Internet Explorer on the desktop.SConnect to an ISP or network and browse the Web. To do this, createthe connection first, as described in “Getting Connected” on page 98.When connected to an ISP or network, you can also download files andprograms from the Internet or intranet.To switch to Pocket Internet Explorer on your 700 Color Computer, tapStart >Internet Explorer.The Mobile Favorites FolderOnly items stored in the Mobile Favorites subfolder in the Favorites folderin Internet Explorer on your desktop are synchronized with your 700 Col-or Computer. This folder was created automatically when you installedActiveSync.Favorite LinksDuring synchronization, the list of favorite links in the Mobile Favoritesfolder on your desktop is synchronized with Pocket Internet Explorer onyour 700 Color Computer. Both computers are updated with changesmade to either list each time you synchronize. Unless you mark the favor-ite link as a mobile favorite, only the link is downloaded to your 700 ColorComputer. Connect to your ISP or network to view the content.1In ActiveSync on your desktop, click Tools >Options, and select “Fa-vorites” from the Mobile Device list. For more information on usingActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop.2In Internet Explorer on your desktop, save or move favorite links to theMobile Favorites subfolder in the Favorites list via Favorites >OrganizeFavorites. For more information on using Internet Explorer, see InternetExplorer Help on the desktop.3Connect your 700 Color Computer to your desktop. If synchronizationdoes not start automatically, in ActiveSync on your desktop, click Sync.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 295700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMobile FavoritesIf you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or later on your desktop,you can download mobile favorites to your 700 Color Computer. Syn-chronizing mobile favorites downloads Web content to your 700 ColorComputer so that you can view pages while you are disconnected fromyour ISP and desktop.Use the Internet Explorer plug-in installed with ActiveSync to create mo-bile favorites quickly. To create a mobile favorite:1In ActiveSync on your desktop, click Tools >Options,andselect“Favorites” from the Mobile Device list. For more information on usingActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop.2In Internet Explorer 5.0 or greater on your desktop, browse to the pageyou want to view offline, then click Tools >Create Mobile Favorite.3To change the link name, enter a new name in the Name box.4In the Update box, select a desired update schedule to keep the page inthe Mobile Favorites folder up to date. You can also update content byclicking Tools >Synchronize in Internet Explorer.5To save the link in a subfolder of Mobile Favorites, click Create In andselect the desired subfolder.6Click OK. Internet Explorer downloads the latest version of the page toyour desktop.7To download the pages that are linked to the mobile favorite you justcreated, in Internet Explorer on the desktop, right-click the mobilefavorite, then click Properties.OntheDownload tab, specify thenumber of links deep you want to download. To conserve 700 ColorComputer memory, go only one level deep.8Connect your 700 Color Computer to your desktop. If synchronizationbetween your 700 Color Computer and desktop does not start, in Acti-veSync on your desktop, click Sync.Mobile favorites take up storage memory on your 700 Color Computer.To minimize the amount of memory used:SIn the settings for the Favorites information, type in ActiveSync op-tions, turn off pictures and sounds, or stop some mobile favorites frombeing downloaded to the 700 Color Computer. For more information,see ActiveSync Help.SLimit the number of downloaded linked pages. In Internet Explorer onthedesktop,right-clickthemobilefavoriteyouwanttochangeandthenProperties.IntheDownload tab, specify “0” or “1” for the number oflinked pages you want to download.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 297700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualViewing Mobile Favorites and Channels1Tap the Favorites button to display your list of favorites.2Tap the page you want to view.Tap the favorite you wantto view.Tap to add or delete a folder or favorite link.The page that was downloaded the last time you synchronized with yourdesktop opens. If the page is not on your 700 Color Computer, the favor-ite is dimmed. Synchronize with your desktop again to download the pageto your 700 Color Computer, or connect to the Internet to view the page.Browsing the Internet1Set up a connection to your ISP or corporate network using Connec-tions, as described in “Getting Connected” on page 98.2To connect and start browsing, do one of the following:STap the Favorites button, and then tap the favorite you want to view.STap View >Address Bar. In the address bar that appears at the top ofthe screen, enter the Web address you want to visit and then tap Go.Tap the arrow to choose from previously entered addresses.Note: To add a favorite link while using the 700 Color Computer, go tothe page you want to add, tap and hold on the page, and tap Add toFavorites.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —298 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGetting ConnectedYou can set up connections to the Internet and corporate network at workto do such activities as browsing the Internet or intranet, sending and re-ceiving e-mail and instant messages, and synchronizing information usingActiveSync.Connections can be made using a modem, wireless network, or Ethernet.You can use a modem connection to set up connections with an externalmodem, or through your mobile phone network using a cellular line orGPRS.Your 700 Series Computer has two groups of connection settings: My ISPand My Work Network. Use My ISP settings to connect to the Internet.Use My Work Network settings to connect to any private network, such asa corporate network used at work.SMy ISP: Once connected, you can send and receive e-mail messages byusing Inbox and view Web or WAP pages by using Pocket Internet Ex-plorer. The communication software for creating an ISP connection isalready installed on your 700 Series Computer. Your service providerprovides the software needed to install other services, such as paging andfax services. If this is the method you want to use, see “Connecting to anInternet Service Provider”onpage98.SMy Work Network: Connect to the network at your company or orga-nization where you work. Once connected, you can send and receivee-mail messages by using Inbox, view Web or WAP pages by usingPocket Internet Explorer, and synchronize with your desktop. If this isthe method you want to use, see “Connecting to Work” on page 102.Connecting to an Internet Service ProviderYou can connect to your ISP, and use the connection to send and receivee-mail messages and view Web or WAP pages. You can connect to yourISP via a modem connection.Obtain the following information from your ISP. Some ISPs require infor-mation in front of the user name, such as MSN/username.SISP dial-up access telephone numberSUser nameSPasswordIf you do not have a modem dock, use a NULL modem cable and ap-propriate adapters to connect an external modem to your 700 Color Com-puter through the serial port.To view additional information for any screen in the wizard or whilechanging settings, tap the Help icon.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 299700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual1Tap Start >Settings >theConnections tab>theConnections icon. InMy ISP,tapAdd a new modem connection.2Enter a name for the connection, such as “ISP Connection.”In the Select a modem list, select your modem type. If your modemtype does not appear, try reinserting the 700 Color Computer into yourmodem dock. If you are using an external modem that is connected toyour 700 Color Computer with a cable, select “Hayes Compatible onCOM1.” Tap Next to continue.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —2100 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual3Enter the access phone number, then tap Next.4You should not need to change any settings in Advanced.MostISPsnow use a dynamically-assigned address. If the ISP you are connectingto does not use a dynamically-assigned address, tap Advanced >theTCP/IP tab, tap Use specific IP address, then enter the address. Tap okto close the Advanced page.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 2101700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualEnter the user name, password, and domain (if provided by an ISP oryour network administrator), then tap Finish.5Tap the Advanced tab from the Connections screen, then tap SelectLocation to specify your current location. These settings apply to allconnections. Tap Use dialing rules,tapOK,then tap Edit to continue.730, 740, 750, 760 Screens 741, 751, 761 Screens

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —2102 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual6Specify your current phone type. If your phone type is pulse dialing,check the Pulse dialing box. If your type is tone dialing (as most phonelines are), then clear the Pulse dialing box. Continue to tap ok to closeeach page and return to the Settings page.To start the connection, start using one of the following programs. Onceconnected, you can:SSend and receive e-mail messages by using Inbox. Before you can useInbox, you need to provide the information it needs to communicatewith the e-mail server. For specific instructions, see “Connecting Directlyto an E-mail Server” on page 114.SVisit Web and WAP pages by using Pocket Internet Explorer. For moreinformation, see “Pocket Internet Explorer” on page 94.SSend and receive instant messages with MSN Messenger. For more in-formation, see “MSN Messenger” on page 84.Note: To change modem connection settings in My ISP, tap Manageexisting connections. Select the desired modem connection, tap Settings,and follow the instructions on the screen.Connecting to WorkIf you have access to a network at work, you can send e-mail messages,view intranet pages, synchronize your 700 Color Computer, and possiblyaccess the Internet. You can connect to work in one of two ways:Create a modem connection by using a RAS (Remote Access Server) ac-count. Before you can create this modem connection, your network ad-ministrator needs to set up a RAS account for you. Your network adminis-trator may also give you Virtual Private Network (VPN) settings.Get a dial-up access telephone number, a user name, and a password fromyour network administrator. If your 700 Color Computer does not haveaccess to a mobile phone network, insert your 700 Color Computer into amodem dock.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 2103700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNote: To change modem connection settings in My Work Network, tapManage existing connections. Select the desired modem connection, tapEdit, and follow the instructions on the screen.To view additional information for any screen in the wizard or whilechanging settings, tap the Help icon.Creating a Modem Connection to Work1Tap Start >Settings >theConnections tab>theConnections icon.Tap Add a new modem connection beneath My Work Network to ini-tiate this procedure.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —2104 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual2Enter a name for the connection, such as “Company Connection.” Inthe Select a modem list, select your modem type. If your modem typedoes not appear, try reinserting your 700 Color Computer into yourmodem dock.SIf using an external modem connected to your 700 Computer with acable, select “Hayes Compatible on COM1.”SIf using any type of external modem, select the modem by name. If alisting does not exist for your external modem, select “Hayes Com-patible on COM1.”SWireless connections can be made via a mobile phone network orGPRS. If using a mobile phone network to connect, select “CellularLine.” If using GPRS, tap “Cellular Line (GPRS).”Tap Next to continue.3Enter the access phone number, using some of the following guidelines.If you know part of the phone number changes frequently as you travel,create dialing rules to avoid creating numerous modem connections forthe same phone number. For more information, tap Use Dialing Rules.SEnterthephonenumberexactlyasyouwantitdialed.Forexample,if you call from a business complex or hotel that requires a nine be-fore dialing out, enter “9” in front of the phone number.SEnter the APN provided by your mobile phone service provider.SWhen using dialing rules, phone numbers are entered differently. Touse additional numbers, such as a “9” to dial from an office complexor hotel, you must use additional dialing rules or change dialing pat-terns. See “Create Dialing Rules” via your online help for information.aIn the Country/Region box, enter the appropriate code when dial-ing internationally. For more information, contact an operator atyour local phone company.bIn the Area code box, enter the area code. Area codes are not need-ed in all countries.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 2105700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualcEnter the main phone number, then tap Next to continue.4Enter the user name, password, and domain (if provided by an ISP oryour network administrator). If a domain name was not provided, trythe connection without entering a domain name.5You should not need to change any advanced settings. Instances whereyou are to change advanced settings include the following. To changeadvanced settings, tap Advanced.Otherwise,tapFinish.SYou want to change baud rate settings, dialing string commands, orcredit card options.SYou need to change port settings.SThe server you are connecting to does not use dynamically-assignedaddresses, and you need to enter your TCP/IP settings.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —2106 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNote: The following information applies when you have “Wireless802.11” selected via the NDISTRAY pop-up menu (see page 129).Creating a Wireless Network ConnectionMicrosoft Corporation’s wireless network configuration tool is called“Wireless Zero Config.” Intermec Technologies recommends that you usethe Wireless Network control panel applet instead as it offers more securitychoices and exhibit better roaming behavior. Information about the Wire-less Network control panel applet is in Appendix A.Networks already configured are preferred networks and are listed inWireless networks. You can connect to only preferred networks or searchfor and connect to any available network.A wireless network can be added either when the network is detected, ormanually by entering settings information. To determine if authenticationinformation is needed, see your network administrator.1Tap Start >Settings >theConnections tab>theConnections icon.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 2107700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual2Tap the Advanced tab > Network Card >theWireless tab > Add New... .3Tap the General tab, then enter a network name. If the network wasdetected, the network name is entered and cannot be changed.From Connects to, select to what your network is to connect. If youselect “Work,” you can do a vpn connection or use proxy servers. If youselect “The Internet,” you can connect directly to the internet.To connect to an ad-hoc connection, select This is a device-to-device(ad-hoc) connection.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —2108 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual4Tap the Network Key tab, then do the following:To Disable AuthenticationaSet Authentication to either “Open” if WEP keys are not required;or “Shared” when WEP keys are required for association.bSet Data Encryption to “Disabled.”To Enable WEP EncryptionaSet Authentication to either “Open” if WEP keys are not required;or “Shared” when WEP keys are required for association.bSet Data Encryption to “WEP.”cTo change the network key, clear The Key is provided for me auto-matically box, then enter the new Network key and select the ap-propriate Key index.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 2109700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNote: The following information applies when you have EnableMicrosoft’s Wireless Zero Config checked via the Wireless Networkcontrol panel applet (see Appendix A, “Configurable Settings”).To Enable WPA Authentication (730, 751, 751, 761 Computers)aSet Authentication to “WPA.” See page 364 for information aboutWPA encryption.bSet Data Encryption to either “WEP” or “TKIP.” See page 364 forinformation about WEP and TKIP encryption.To Enable WPA Authentication Using a Preshared Key (730, 741, 751, 761 Computers)aSet Authentication to “WPA-PSK.” See page 364 for informationabout WPA encryption.bSet Data Encryption to either “WEP” or “TKIP.” See page 364 forinformation about WEP and TKIP encryption.cEnter the new Network key.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —2110 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual5Tap the 802.1x tab, select either “PEAP” or “Smart Card or Certificate”for the EAP type,thentapProperties to adjust its settings.6Tap ok to return to the Configure Wireless Network screen.7From the Networks to access drop-down list, select “All Available,”“Only access points,” or “Only computer-to-computer” depending onthetypeofnetworkstowhichyouconnect.To connect only to networks you have already configured, clear Auto-matically connect to non-preferred networks.Tap ok to close this screen.Note: If you select to automatically connect to non-preferred networks,your device detects any new networks and provide you the opportunity toconfigure them.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 2111700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCreating a VPN Server Connection to WorkA VPN connection helps you to securely connect to servers, such as a cor-porate network, via the Internet. Ask your network administrator for thefollowing:SUser nameSPasswordSDomain nameSTCP/IP settingsSHost name or IP address of the VPN serverTo view additional information for any screen in the wizard or whilechanging settings, tap the Help icon.Note: To change existing settings in My Work Network, tap Manageexisting connections >theVPN tab. Select the desired VPN connection,tap Settings, and follow the instructions on the screen.1Tap Start >Settings >theConnections tab>theConnections icon.Tap Add a new VPN server connection beneath My Work Network toinitiate this procedure.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —2112 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual2In Name, enter a name for the connection, such as a company’s name.In Host name/ IP, enter the VPN server name or IP address.Next to VPN type, select the type of authentication to use with yourdevice: “IPSec/L2TP” or “PPTP.” If you are not sure which option tochoose, ask your network administrator.Tap Next to continue.3Selectthetypeofauthentication.IfyouselectA pre-shared key,enterthe key provided by your network administrator.

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 2113700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual4Enter your user name, password, and domain name as provided by yourISP or network administrator. If a domain name was not provided, trythe connection without entering a domain name.5You should not need to change any Advanced settings. Instances whereyou must change advanced settings include:SThe server to which you are connecting does not use dynamically-as-signed addresses, and you need to enter your TCP/IP settings.SYou need to change server DNS or WINS settings.To change advanced settings, tap Advanced.Otherwise,tapFinish.Insert necessary equipment, such as a network (Ethernet) card, into thedevice, and use a desired program to automatically begin connecting. Forexample, switch to Pocket Internet Explorer and browse to a Web page.Ending a ConnectionTo disconnect, do one of the following:SWhen connected via modem or VPN, tap the Connectivity icon on thenavigation bar, and then tap Disconnect.SWhen connected via cable or cradle, detach your device.SWhen connected via Infrared, move the device away from the othercomputer or device.SWhen connected via a wireless network, switch off the connection.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —2114 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualConnecting Directly to an E-mail ServerYou can set up a connection to an e-mail server so that you can send andreceive e-mail messages by using a modem or network connection and In-box on your 700 Color Computer.Note: The ISP or network must use a POP3 or IMAP4 e-mail server andan SMTP gateway.You can use multiple e-mail services to receive your messages. For eache-mail service you intend to use, first set up and name the e-mail service. Ifyou use the same service to connect to different mailboxes, set up andname each mailbox connection.Setting Up an E-mail AccountDo the following to set up an e-mail service. Tap the question mark at thetop of the screen for more assistance.1On your 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Inbox to access the Inboxapplication. Tap Accounts >New Account.2Enter an e-mail address, tap Next,Cancel,thenNext after the status ofthe automatic configuration is listed as “Completed.”

Windows Mobile 2003—Chapter 2115700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual3Enter the Your name and Password information, then tap Next.4Select the appropriate service type from the Account type drop-downlist, either “POP3” or “IMAP4,” or enter a new account type, then tapNext.

Windows Mobile 2003Chapter —2116 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual5In Incoming mail,enterthenameofyoure-mailserver.InOutgoingmail,enterthenameofyourSimpleMailTransferProtocol(SMTP)host. If you are using a network connection, enter your domain name inDomain.TapOptions to do additional configurations. Tap Finish toassign this service.When finished, to connect to your e-mail server, from the Inbox applica-tion, tap Accounts >Connect. For more information on using the Inboxapplication, see “Inbox: Sending and Receiving E-mail Messages”onpage73.

117700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualInstalling Applications3There are multiple ways to get an application to your 700 Series ColorMobile Computer; just as there are multiple ways to package the applica-tion for delivery.Note: “700 Color” pertains to 740, 741, 750, 751, 760, and 761 Com-puters unless otherwise noted.

$Installing ApplicationsChapter —3118 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPackaging an ApplicationUseanyofthesemethodstopackageanapplicationforinstallation:SFor very simple applications, the application itself might be the only filethat needs to be delivered.SIt could be a directory structure that contains the application, support-ing files like ActiveX controls, DLLs, images, sound files, and data files.SOr, you could package an application via a CAB file.Consider any of the following when choosing a location into which tostore your application:SIn the basic 700 Color Computer, there are two built-in storage op-tions: the Object Store and the Persistent Storage Manager (PSM). TheObject Store is RAM that looks like a disk. Anything copied here is de-leted when a cold-boot is performed on the 700 Color Computer. ThePSMisanareaofstoragewhichisembeddedinasectionofthesystem’sFLASH memory. This storage area is not erased during a cold-boot. Itmay, however, be erased during the reflashing process. In addition tostoring applications and data files, you do have the option to store a per-sistent registry to the PSM region.SIf the optional Secure Digital or CompactFlash storage card is in thesystem, then consider this card the primary location for placing an ap-plications install files. The following folders represent either card:SThe Secure Digital storage card creates the “\SDMMC Disk” folder.SThe CompactFlash storage card creates the “\Storage Card” folder.Note: The 730 Mobile Computer does not support the CompactFlash storage card.SUse the small non-volatile Flash File Store region to hold CAB files thatrebuild the system at cold-boot or install applications from a CAB fileinto the Flash File Store so they are ”ready-to-run” when a cold-boot isperformed. Since the FLASH in the system has a limited number ofwrite cycles, do not use the Flash File Store for excessive writing pur-poses; however, reading is okay.Files copied to any of these locations are safe when a cold-boot isperformed on a 700 Color Computer — providing the AutoRun system isinstalled in the appropriate location You can find this system in the 700Color Management Tools portion of the Intermec Developer’s Library CD.Copying a CAB file to the “\CABFILES” folder on one of these cardsautomatically extracts that CAB file on every cold-boot to ensure that yoursystem is properly set up (see page 124).$

Installing Applications—Chapter 3119700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualInstalling ApplicationsConsider any of the following options to get the package to the preferredlocation on your 700 Series Computer.SMicrosoft ActiveSyncSFTP Server (page 120)SSecure Digital or CompactFlash storage cards (page 120)Using Microsoft ActiveSyncNote: These instructions assume the 700 Color Management Tools por-tion of the Intermec Developer’s Library CD was installed on your desktop.The Microsoft ActiveSync tool is located on the 700 Color Companion CD.See Chapter 2, “Windows Mobile 2003,” for information about this tool asprovided by Microsoft Corporation.This can be a serial, USB, Ethernet, InfraRed, or 802.11b ActiveSync con-nection. Files can be copied using File Explorer on a desktop or a laptopcomputer. This is usually good when updating few 700 Color Computers.Note: The 730 Computer does not support Ethernet.These instructions assume that Microsoft ActiveSync was installed ontoyour desktop and is up and running. If not, go to Chapter 2, “WindowsMobile 2003,” for an URL from which to download the latest application.1Connectyour700ColorComputertoyourdesktopcomputerviaanActiveSync cable or IrDA.2Wait for a “Connected” message to appear in the Microsoft ActiveSyncapplication to signal a connection to the 700 Series Computer. If neces-sary, select File >Get Connected to initiate a connection.

$Installing ApplicationsChapter —3120 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual3Click Explore toaccesstheMobileDevicefolderonyourunit.4From your desktop, select Start >Windows Explorer, then browse the“C:\Intermec\700C Mgmt Tools\CabFiles” path for any CAB filesneeded for your 700 Color Computer. Select the appropriate file, right-click the file for a pop-up menu, then select Copy.5Within the Mobile Device directory, go to the directory where youwant the files located on the 700 Color Computer, do a right-click for apop-up menu, then select Paste.6When all of the files are pasted, perform a warm-boot on the 700 ColorComputer. When the computer reboots, wait for the LED on the topleft of your keypad to stop blinking. Tap Start >Programs >FileExplorer to locate the newly copied executable files, then tap these filesto activate their utilities.Using the FTP ServerThe 700 Color Computer has a built-in FTP Server that connects to a net-work via Ethernet, 802.11b, or WAN (Wireless Access Network). Thisallows connections to the 700 Color Computer to perform file transfers orcomputer management functions. Another benefit is you can create FTPscripts to automate the process of copying files to the 700 Color Comput-er.Thisoptionisgoodforwhenalargenumberof700ColorComputersneed updating. See Chapter 7, “Programming,” for more information.Using a Storage CardUse the following steps to install an application using a storage card:Copying to a CompactFlash CardNote: These instructions do not apply to the 730 Computer.1Suspendthe700ColorComputerandremoveitsCompactFlashdrive,which holds a SanDisk CompactFlash storage card.2Using a CompactFlash Adapter card, place the CompactFlash drive inyour desktop PC card drive.3Create a subdirectory on the PCMCIA CompactFlash drive in which tostore your application.4Use the CEImager application to add the autorun system to the storagecard. See the Software Tools User’s Manual to learn about CEImager.5Copy your application, data files, and all required DLLs and drivers tothe subdirectory created on the CompactFlash drive.6Add your application to the AUTOUSER.DAT file on the“\Storage Card\2577” directory with the following statement:RUN=\<your directory>\<yourapp.exe>where your directory is the directory on the CompactFlash storage cardwhere the application was installed, and yourapp.exe isthenameofyourapplication. Finish the “RUN=” statement with a carriage return line-feed combination. There may be multiple run statements in the file.$

$Installing Applications—Chapter 3121700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual7Remove the CompactFlash card from your desktop and reinstall it intothe 700 Color Computer.8Warm-boot the 700 Color Computer to add these files to the Compact-Flash storage card.If the AUTOUSER.DAT file is found and the “RUN=” statement is cor-rect, the task manager launches and executes your program on startup.Copying to a Secure Digital Storage Card1Suspend the 700 Color Computer and remove its Secure Digital drive,which holds a Secure Digital storage card.2Using a Secure Digital Adapter card, place the Secure Digital drive inyour desktop PC card drive.3Create a subdirectory on the PCMCIA Secure Digital drive in which tostore your application.4Use the CEImager application to add the autorun system to the storagecard. See the Software Tools User’s Manual to learn about CEImager.5Copy your application, data files, and all required DLLs and drivers tothesubdirectorycreatedontheSecureDigitaldrive.6Add your application to the AUTOUSER.DAT file on the“\SDMMC Disk\2577” directory with the following statement:RUN=\<your directory>\<yourapp.exe>where your directory is the directory on the Secure Digital storage cardwhere the application was installed, and yourapp.exe isthenameofyourapplication. Finish the “RUN=” statement with a carriage return line-feed combination. There may be multiple run statements in the file.7Remove the Secure Digital card from your desktop and reinstall it intothe 700 Color Computer.8Warm-boot the 700 Color Computer to add these files to the SecureDigital storage card.If the AUTOUSER.DAT file is found and the “RUN=” statement is cor-rect, the task manager launches and executes your program on startup.Updating the System SoftwareYou can use the Intermec Recovery CD to reinstall or update the operatingsystem software on the 700 Color Computer. For more information, con-tact your Intermec representative.$

$Installing ApplicationsChapter —3122 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMigrating ApplicationsNote: These instructions assume that the 700 Color Management Toolsportion of the Intermec Developer’s Library CD was installed on your desk-top and that a storage card was added to the base configuration of the 700Color Computer.Do the following required stepstoensurethatCABfilesarerestored,ap-plications automatically start, and registry is restored on cold-boot:1From your desktop, double-click the Intermec CE Imager desktop iconto access the Intermec CEImager application. If this icon is not on yourdesktop, then double-click the CEIMAGER.EXE executable from the“C:\Intermec\700C Mgmt Tools\Tools\CEImager” folder.2Click Default under Components List to activate the components.3Click (+) to expand the AutoRun System component, click (+) to ex-pand the Destination Media option, then select either theCompactFlash Card option or the Secure Digital Card option. Do notselect both storage cards, as the AutoRun files copied will work for one stor-age card, but not work on the other storage card.Note: The 730 Computer does not support CompactFlash storage cards.4Click Install to install the AUTORUN files onto the storage card.5Create a “\CabFiles” folder on the storage card. Copy any CAB files thatare to be extracted on every startup into this folder.$

$Installing Applications—Chapter 3123700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual6In the “\2577” directory, add your custom AUTOUSER.DAT file. Seethe Recovery Help for more information on how to set up anAUTOUSER.DAT file.7If you are using the RegFlushKey() API, the application must use a spe-cial API to make sure the registry is written to the appropriate card; oryou can use the Utilities control panel applet, as follows. See AppendixA, “Configurable Settings,” for more information about this applet.aFrom the 700 Series Computer, tap Start >Settings >theSystem tab>theUtilities icon > the Registry Save tab.bTap Enable Registry Storage to save the registry in the Flash File Sys-tem (PSM) via the “\Flash_File_Store\Registry” path.cTap ok to save your entry and exit the Utilities control panel applet.700 Color Screen 730 Screen8Remove the storage card from the desktop PC and install the card intothe 700 Series Computer.9Perform a cold-boot on the 700 Series Computer. Files automaticallyinstall from the storage card upon reboot. Any calls to theRegFlushKey() API automatically writes the registry to the appropriatelocation.Note: Both the warm-boot and the cold-boot procedures, via the softwareAPI, will also flush the registry.$

$Installing ApplicationsChapter —3124 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMigrating from a 700 Monochrome ComputerAs you migrate from a 700 Monochrome Computer to a 700 Color Com-puter, you need to consider the following: When converting a 700 Mono-chrome Computer application to run on the 700 Color Computer, mostAPIs should work without changes. Below are a few exceptions:SThe 700 Monochrome Computer uses the “\Storage Card” folder fornonvolatile storage. You may need to change the application to storedata onto the “SDMMC Disk” folder instead of the “\Storage Card”folder if a Secure Digital storage card is present in the system.SIf the application uses the RegFlushKey() API, it must first verify thatthe proper media is available in the system and call the special API men-tioned in Step 7 on the previous page.SIftheapplicationisusingthe700Colorswitchabledock,usetheIOCTL_DOCK_SWITCH value from theIOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM function to set the properport on the dock before communications. See more information aboutthis KernelIOControl function in Chapter 7, “Programming.”SSome WAN radio options have changed. Review the WAN radio infor-mation in Chapter 4, “Network Support,“to determine if any changes arerequired in your application.SArrow and tab keys are reversed from the 700 Monochrome Computer.Keyboard remapping is available on the 700 Color Computer shouldyou need to map these keys like that of the 700 Monochrome Comput-er (see page 121).SSpecial SDKs are not needed to compile applications for the Xscale pro-cessor. Targeting the SA1110 processor creates applications that run onthe 700 Color Computer.Installing Cabinet FilesCAB files (short form of “cabinet” files) are compressed folders as defined byMicrosoft. A “cabinet” file is a single file, usually suffixed with .CAB, thatstores compressed files in a file library. A compressed file can be spreadover several cabinet files. During installation, the setup application decom-presses the files stored in a cabinet and copies them to the user’s system.For the 700 Series Computer, CAB files register DLLs, create shortcuts,modify registry entries, and run custom setup programs. Tap a CAB file toextract that file or place the CAB file on one of the approved storage de-vices in the “\CabFiles” folder, then perform a warm-boot on the 700 Se-ries Computer. There are two methods available to extract a CAB file:STap a CAB file to extract it. With this method, the CAB file is automat-ically deleted when the extraction process is successful, unless the CABfile is set with the read-only attribute.SUse the AUTOCAB method to extract all files when a cold-boot is per-formed on the 700 Series Computer. This method is on the IntermecDeveloper’s Library CD,seeitsSoftware Tools User’s Manual for informa-tion.$

125700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNetwork Support4The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer can integrate up to three radios ina single unit, and automatically installs the appropriate software for radioor phone use when the unit is powered on.Note: “700 Color” pertains to 740, 741, 750, 751, 760, and 761 Com-puters unless otherwise noted.

Network SupportChapter —4126 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUnderstanding Your 700 Series ComputerDue to the number of 700 Series Computers now available, and to thenumber of applications, drivers, and modules that may or may not beavailable, these tables are to help you determine what is on your particularcomputer.Hardware Features730 Computers 802.11b radio, Bluetooth740 Computers Ethernet, Bluetooth741 Computers Ethernet, Bluetooth750 Computers Ethernet, 802.11b radios, Bluetooth751 Computers Ethernet, 802.11b/g radios, Bluetooth760 Computers Ethernet, 802.11b, CDMA/1xRTT WAN (data only*), GSM/GPRS WAN (data and voice)radios, Bluetooth761 Computers Ethernet, 802.11b/g, CDMA/1xRTT WAN (data and voice), GSM/GPRS WAN (data andvoice) radios, Bluetooth*ThisisforunitssoldintheUnitedStates.Software ApplicationsComputers: 730 740 741 750 751 760 761CORE (page 132) XXXXXXX*Microsoft Phone for CDMA Radios (page 140) XMicrosoft Phone for GSM Radios (page 149) XOn-board Wired Ethernet (page 128) XXXXXXPhoneUtility (page 154) XSB555 Watcher (page 157) XWireless Local Area Network (page 129) X XXXXWireless Personal Area Network (page 182) XXXXXXXWireless Wide Area Network XXWWAN Communicator** X XWWAN Toolkit XX* Does not apply to WAN radios** See the “WWAN Communicator User’s Guide” P/N: 074250.

Network Support—Chapter 4127700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAntennas (760/761 Computers)The 760 Computers have color-coded tips to identify the WWAN radiotype within. Below are the colors and their types. The 761 Computers inthe United States and Canada use the external antenna with no color in itstip. See your Intermec representative for more information.SRed (760 Computers)CDMA (non-Sprint networks) and GSM/GPRS US/CanadaSWhite (760 Computers)GSM/GPRS US/Canada and CDMA Sprint networksSBlue (760/761 Computers)GSM/GPRS International (MC45 WAN radios)SNo Color (761 Computers)CDMA and GSM/GPRS US/Canada (MC46 WAN radios)Network AdaptersYour 700 Color Computer can have up to three radios installed. The de-fault network adapter or radio is dependent on what radios are installed inyour 700 Color Computer.With the boot menu, you can specify “802.11,” “Ethernet,” or “No Net-working” to load onto your 700 Color Computer when a cold-boot is per-formed. When a warm boot is performed, the 700 Color Computer loadsthe network set just prior to the warm boot.The 730 Computer only has the 802.11b radio and wireless printing. Itdoes not have an external antenna. Other radios are not supported. See theDeveloper’s Support web site for the latest information on network adapt-ers for your unit.

Network SupportChapter —4128 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualEthernet Communications (740, 741, 750, 751, 760, 761 Computers)Follow the steps below to start Ethernet communications on the 700 ColorComputer. If your system does not contain an 802.11b or 802.11b/gradio, then Ethernet networking using DHCP is selected as the default.When “Built-in Ethernet” is selected from the NDISTRAY pop-up menu(the Network Driver Interface Specification tray application),then the Ethernet icon shown to the left appears in the System Tray ascircled in the following illustration.

Network SupportChapter —4130 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNo NetworkingWhen “No networking” is selected from the NDISTRAY pop-up menu:the disconnected icon shown to the left appears in the system tray ascircled in the following illustration.Network Selection APIsThe Network Selection APIs change the network adapter configurationprogrammatically. Both drivers support the same IOCTL function num-bers for loading and unloading the drivers. Go to Chapter 7, “Program-ming,” to see the APIs.

Network Support—Chapter 4131700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNetwork ConnectionsFrom the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings >theConnectionstab > Connections >theAdvanced tab > Network Card or the NetworkAdapters tab to access the network connections for this unit. Make thechanges necessary for your network, then tap ok when finished. Considerthe following before making your selection:SFor a work connection or an internet connection, select the “Built-InEthernet (10 Mbps)” option.SThe “802.11b Wireless LAN” option is for 750 and 760 Computerswith legacy 802.11b radios.SThe “802.11b PRISM Wireless LAN” option is for 750 and 760 Com-puters with standard 802.11b radios.SThe “802.11b/g Wireless LAN” option is for 751 and 761 Computerswith the latest 802.11b/g radios.700 Color Screen 730 Screen

$Network SupportChapter —4132 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCORE (760, 761 Computers with WAN Radios)The Intermec CORE application provides a framework for various mod-ules that let you configure and manage your Intermec products. If a mod-uleisnotyetusedorset,COREdefaultstothefirstmoduleaslistedal-phabetically.These modules are software plug-ins that can be configuration tools, suchas the 802.11b or 802.11b/g radio configuration module, or they can pro-vide information on your environment, such as a battery life module.CORE modules are collections of specific information. Each module candisplay general and detailed information. Tap the General and Details tabsnear the bottom to switch between general and detailed information. Notethat not all modules have detailed information.Activating CORECORE is built into the operating system of every 760 or 761 Computer.To run CORE for the first time, select Start >Programs >File Explorer,select “\Flash File Store\Apps\CORE,” then tap the CORE executable file.After CORE is run on the 760 or 761 Computer, tap Start >Programs >Core to access this application henceforth.Note: To deactivate CORE, tap CORE >Exit from within the COREapplication.Install an Available Radio ModuleTo install an available radio module onto your 760 or 761 Computer, tapModules >Add/Remove, select a module from the bottom Available box,then tap Add to put the selected module in the upper Installed box. ClickOK to exit the Add/Remove Modules screen.$

$Network Support—Chapter 4133700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualLoading a Radio ModuleTo load or switch to another radio module installed on the 760 or 761Computer, tap Modules >Choose Module, select a module from theInstalled Modules box, then tap Choose to initialize and begin using thatmodule.To learn more about this application, see its online help. Tap Start >Programs >File Explorer and select “\Flash File Store\Apps\CORE,” thentap the corehelp .HTM file.Note: Once CORE is running, you can return to it by tapping its iconfrom the System Tray via the Today screen. Tap Start >Today >theCorethree-ring icon (circled in the following illustration).802.11 CF CORE ModuleThe 802.11 CF CORE module displays helpful information about the802.11b or 802.11b/g radio option built into your 760 or 761 Computer.Note that you can configure the 802.11b or 802.11b/g radio module fromthis CORE application. Select Configure >Configure Intermec 802.11CF from the bottom menu bar to access the Profile Wizard application.See Appendix A, “Configurable Settings,” for information about this ap-plication via the Wireless Network control panel applet.$

Network Support—Chapter 4135700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualDetailsBelow are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-vided via the Details tab. Note the information is listed alphabetically.Attach-Roam Cnt Includes the number of new associations made during the current session, due to roaming. Thenumber is reset on suspend/resume cycles.CCX Status States the status of the CCX features, either enabled or disabled.Desired SSID Identifies the preferred Service Set Identifier (SSID).Driver Name Identifies the 802.11b or 802.11b/g driver installed on this 700 Color Computer.Last 5 Supp Msgs Monitors and reports the 802.11 Security Supplicant activity.Scanlist Indicates whether the Scan List option was enabled or disabled.Supplicant Status Monitors the 802.11 security activity on the client: “Running” or “Stopped.”CDMA/1xRTT CORE Module (760 Computers with WAN Radios)Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) is a form of wide area wirelesscommunications. 1XRTT supports up to 144 KB per second packet datatransmission.The WAN radio CORE module displays helpful information about theCDMA/1xRTT radio option built into your 760 Computer.

Network SupportChapter —4136 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWAN Monitor — GeneralBelow are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-vided via the General tab. Note that the information is listed alphabetically.Activated Indicates whether the ESN on this unit was ever activated. Note: this activation indicates that thedevice was activated at some point in time. However, it does not guarantee that the activation is validor is working on the carrier’s network.f/w Identifies the firmware version, if available.Network Type The network type which would list “CDMA-1XRTT.”On Indicates when activation was provided by your service provider.Phone Number Identifies the telephone number (or MDN) assigned to the WAN Module installed in your unit.Radio ESN Lists the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) assigned to this radio module or “Unavailable” if anumber cannot be read from the radio. This number is required for activation. You must providethis number to your service provider, such as Sprint, Verizon, Bell Mobility, etc., for activation.Note a decimal version of your ESN is on the Details page.Registered onhome networkIf the WAN radio module is registered with a service provider network, one of these appears:SRegistered on home network: Radio module is registered on its “home” network.SRegistered on roamed network: Radio module registered on another service provider’s network.SRadio Not Registered: There is no network within range of this radio module.RSSI Displays the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) frequency or lists “Unavailable” if thereis no signal or the signal cannot be retrieved from the radio module.Serial Status Indicates whether serial communications passed (“Serial com OK”) or failed (“Serial com FAIL”)in its last transaction. A status of “Serial com FAIL” typically indicates that the 760 Computer isunable to establish communication with the radio module installed within.Verizon Network Identifies your network service provider.History:This bar graph displays an active history of this radio module’s quality ofconnections.Friendly Indicator:Usually indicates the signal strength for this radio module. Three filleddots indicate a high quality or strong signal. Three empty dots indicatethat the signal is out of range or there is no signal detected.

Network Support—Chapter 4137700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWAN Monitor — DetailsBelow are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-vided via the Details tab. Most of this is similar to what is shown underthe General tab. Note that the information is listed alphabetically.ESN Lists the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) assigned to this radio module or “Unavailable” if a num-ber cannot be read from the radio. This number is required for activation. You must provide thisnumber to your service provider, such as Sprint, Verizon, Bell Mobility, etc., for activation. Notethat both the hex version and the decimal version of your ESN is provided.Firmware Rev Identifies the firmware version, if available.Firmware Type Identifies the type of firmware installed in the WAN radio module. It should match the carrieryou are using as your network provider.Hardware Rev Identifies the hardware revision of the WAN radio module installed in your unit.IMSI/MIN Shows the IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) number assigned to the SubscriberIdentity Module (SIM) card installed in this 760 Computer.Manufacturer Lists the name of the manufacturer that developed this radio module, such as “Sierra Wireless.”MDN Shows the MDN (Mobile Directory Number) or DN (Directory Number) — the number thatidentifies the account tied to your device. You can consider this the “phone number.” Note thatthe MDN and IMSI/MIN numbers can be the same.Model Lists the product name for this radio module, such as “Model 72.”Phone Number Identifies the telephone assigned to the WAN radio module.PRI Version Provides the version number of the Preferred Roaming List (PRL).Radio Temp Identifies the temperature of the radio module, or lists “Unavailable degrees” if no information ortemperaturecannotbemeasured.Rx (abbreviation for receive) Indicates the number of bytes received over the WAN connection sincethe CORE WAN Module was started.Tx (abbreviation for transmit) Indicates the number of bytes received over the WAN connection sincethe CORE WAN Module was started.

Network SupportChapter —4138 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGSM/GPRS CORE Module (760 Computers with WAN Radios)GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open, nonpro-prietary wireless system. GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) is the high-speed data evolution of GSM that supports Internet Protocol (IP), enab-ling access to Internet and intranet content and applications from GPRSwireless devices.WAN Monitor — GeneralThe WAN Monitor CORE module displays helpful information about theGSM/GPRS radio option built into your 760 Computer. The followingillustrations are for a GSM/GPRS Siemens MC45 radio.Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-vided via the General tab. Note that the information is listed alphabetically.ATT WirelessNetworkLists the name of the service providing the network support.Band Identifies the frequency spectrum used by the radio module.BER (Bit Error Rate) The average number of bits transmitted in error.f/w Identifies the firmware version, if available.h/w Identifies the hardware version, if available.Network Type The network type which would list “GSM-GPRS.”Phone Number Identifies the telephone number assigned to the SIM card.Radio ESN The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) assigned to this radio module. “Unavailable” appears if anumber cannot be read from the radio.Registered onhome networkIf the WAN radio module has registered with a service provider network, one of these appears:SRegistered on home network: Radio module is registered on its “home” network.SRegistered on roamed network: Radio module registered on another service provider’s network.SRadio Not Registered: There is no network within range of this radio module.RSSI Displays the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) frequency or lists “Unavailable” if thereis no signal or the signal cannot be retrieved from the radio module.Serial Status Indicates whether serial communications passed (“Serial com OK”) or failed (“Serial com FAIL”)in its last transaction. A status of “Serial com FAIL” typically indicates that the 760 Computer isunable to establish communication with the radio module installed within.History:This bar graph displays an active history of this radio module’s quality ofconnections.

Network Support—Chapter 4139700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualFriendly Indicator:Usually indicates the signal strength for this radio module. Three filleddots indicate a high quality or strong signal. Three empty dots indicatethat the signal is out of range or there is no signal detected.WAN Monitor — DetailsBelow are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-vided via the Details tab. Most of this is similar to what is shown underthe General tab. Note that the information is listed alphabetically.Firmware Rev Identifies the firmware version, if available.IMEI # The IMEI (International Mobile station Equipment Identity) serial number of the GSM/GPRSradio module.IMSI # Shows the IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) number assigned to the SIM cardinstalled in this 760 Computer.Manufacturer Lists the name of the manufacturer that developed this radio module, such as “Siemens.”Model Lists the product name for this radio module, such as “MC45.”Net Provider Lists the name of the service providing the network support.RSSI Displays the RSSI frequency or lists “Unavailable” if there is no signal or the signal cannot beretrieved from the radio module.SIM Status Identifies whether a SIM card is installed in this 760 Computer.

Network SupportChapter —4140 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMicrosoft Phone Application (761 Computers with CDMA Radios)With the WAN radio module installed in your 761 Computer, you cansend and receive telephone calls. Use the speaker on the back of the com-puter as your earpiece and use the connector on the bottom of the com-puter for your mouthpiece.Tap Start >Programs >thePhone desktop icon or tap Start >Phonefrom the Today screen to access the application which processes yourphone calls. Tap the Close button in the upper right corner of thisapplication to close.Data Provisioning (Sprint)Note: If you wish to do this activation another time, tap Cancel to closethis wizard, then tap Yes.It is necessary to initiate activation before using your Microsoft Phone ap-plication. Below are the instructions:1From the Phone application, tap Tools >Activation Wizard.2Have your activation code, phone number (MDN), and MSID infor-mation ready before you tap Next to continue. You can get this infor-mation from your network provider.

Network Support—Chapter 4141700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual3Enter your 6-digit activation code, then tap Next to continue.4Enter your phone number and MSID from Sprint, then tap Next tocontinue.

Network SupportChapter —4142 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual5The application prompts whether the information entered is correct. Ifso, tap Yes to continue, otherwise tap No to return to the MSN andMSID screen.6Note that voice service is available immediately. Data service take aminimum of four hours of activation before you can use the service. Ifafter four hours, a data connection is not established, see “Data Provi-sioning” on page 140 to manually launch data provisioning.The application acknowledges that your phone will be in service in fourhours. Tap Finish to close the wizard.

Network Support—Chapter 4143700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPhone ApplicationNote: Wait at least four hours after activation is complete before using thisapplication. Data provisioning should occur automatically. Network infor-mation about your 761 Computer needs to propogate through the SprintNetwork after the activation is complete.If data provisioning does not occur automatically, tap Start >Settings >the Personal tab>thePhone icon. Tap the Data tab, then tap Provisionto initiate a session.Tap the appropriate keys to enter a telephone number, then tap Talk todial the number. Tap End to “hang up” the phone.Tap this to dial the phone numbershown above the keypad.Tap this to backspace one digit.Tap this to select a previouslydialed number.Tap this to view your previous calls.Tap this to “hang up” your currentcall.Tap this to access the Contacts application.Tap this toggle the mute option.Tap this to access the Notes application.

Network SupportChapter —4144 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSpeed DialTap Speed Dial to select a telephone number with which the 761 Com-puter is to dial automatically. To add to this list, use the Contacts applica-tion. See Chapter 2, “Windows Mobile 2003,” for more information aboutthe Contacts application.Call HistoryTap Call History to note the telephone numbers that were previouslydialed from this 761 Computer.

Network Support—Chapter 4145700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualToolsUse the Tools menu to send a voice mail, access the Activation Wizard,send an SMS email message, or configure phone settings.STap Tools >Voice Mail to call and leave a voice message.STap Tools >Activation Wizard to access the wizard with which to acti-vate your 761 Computer. Be sure to have an activation code, a phonenumber, and MSID information ready. See page 140 for instructions onusing this wizard.STap Tools >Send SMS tab to access the Inbox application and send anSMS (Short Messaging Service) message. Be sure to have an SMS num-ber ready to send the message — this is usually the mobile phone num-ber. See Chapter 2, “Windows Mobile 2003,” for information about theInbox application.

Network SupportChapter —4146 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPhone SettingsEither select Tools >Options from the Phone application or select Start >Settings >thePersonal tab>thePhone icon to access the Phone Settingscontrol panel applet.STap the Phone tab to customize your phone settings such as the ringtype and ring tone to use for incoming calls, and the keypad tone to usewhen entering phone numbers. Tap Other Settings to go to the Sounds& Notifications control panel applet. Select Start >Help for more onlineinformation about this feature.STap the Location tab to toggle between letting your location be visiblefor everyone to detect and hiding your location from everyone except911.

Network SupportChapter —4148 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSTap the Phone Info tab to view the phone settings.

Network Support—Chapter 4149700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMicrosoft Phone Application (761 Computers with GSM Radios)With the WAN radio module installed in your 761 Computer, you cansend and receive telephone calls. Use the speaker on the back of the com-puter as your earpiece and use the connector on the bottom of the com-puter for your mouthpiece.Tap Start >Programs >thePhone desktop icon or tap Start >Phonefrom the Today screen to access the application which processes yourphone calls. Tap the Close button in the upper right corner of thisapplication to close.ActivationThe GSM phone is activated via a SIM card that you can purchase fromyour network provider.Phone ApplicationTap the appropriate keys to enter a telephone number, then tap Talk todial the number.Tap this to dial the phone numbershown above the keypad.Tap this to backspace one digit.Tap this to select a previouslydialed number.Tap this to view your previous calls.Tap this to access the Contacts application.Tap this toggle the mute option.Tap this to access the Notes application.

Network SupportChapter —4150 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCall HistoryTap Call History to note the telephone numbers that were previouslydialed from this 761 Computer.Speed DialTap Speed Dial to select a telephone number with which the 761 Com-puter is to dial automatically. To add to this list, use the Contacts applica-tion. See Chapter 2, “Windows Mobile 2003,” for more information aboutthe Contacts application.

Network Support—Chapter 4151700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualToolsTap Tools >Send SMS tab to access the Inbox application and send anSMS (Short Messaging Service) message. Be sure to have an SMS numberready to send the message — this is usually the mobile phone number. SeeChapter 2, “Windows Mobile 2003,” for information about the Inbox ap-plication.Phone SettingsEither select Tools >Options from the Phone application or select Start >Settings >thePersonal tab>thePhone icon to access the Phone Settingscontrol panel applet. Select Start >Help for more online information aboutthese features.STap the Phone tab to customize your phone settings such as the ringtype and ring tone to use for incoming calls, and the keypad tone to usewhen entering phone numbers. Tap Other Settings to go to the Sounds& Notifications control panel applet.

Network SupportChapter —4152 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSTap the Services tab to access settings for any of the provided services.Tap any of the settings, then tap Get Settings.Makeyourchanges,thentap ok to return to the Settings screen. Below is a sample Settingsscreen.

Network Support—Chapter 4153700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSTap the Network tab to find, set, or select the type of network onwhich this phone is to communicate.

Network SupportChapter —4154 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPhoneUtility (760 Computers with GPRS Radios)Note: This application is for 760 Computers with GPRS radios only, dueto E911 requirements issued by the FCC. In the United States, voice isnot an option on 760 Computers with CDMA radios.With the WAN radio module installed in your 760 Computer, you cansend and receive telephone calls. Use the speaker on the back of the com-puter as your earpiece and use the connector on the bottom of the com-puter for your mouthpiece.Tap Start >PhoneUtility from the Today screen to access the applicationwhich will process your phone calls. Tap Exit or ok to close thisapplication and return to the Today screen.Audio ModeSelect either Handset or Speakerphone from the Audio Mode box, thendo the following to send or answer a phone call:STap the numbers for a phone call, using Clear to erase each digit, thentap Send to initiate the call.STap Answer to receive an incoming call.STap End to disconnect a transaction.SDrag the Vol slider up or down to adjust the speaker volume.SDrag the Mic slider up or down to adjust the microphone sensitivity.Handset Audio Mode Speakerphone Audio Mode

Network Support—Chapter 4155700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNotificationTap Settings to set your 760 Computer to either ring or vibrate or doboth, then tap OK or ok to return to the Audio Mode screen. If you needto adjust the audio settings, tap Advanced Audio to continue.Advanced AudioTap ok to close the warning and continue.

Network SupportChapter —4156 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualDrag the appropriate slider bars left or right to adjust the output and in-put levels. Tap Defaults to return the handset or speakerphone levels totheir factory defaults. Click OK or ok to return to the Notification screen.Handset Output/Input Levels Speakerphone Output/Input LevelsTap ?for more information on these level settings, then click ok or OK toreturn to the Output/Input Levels screen.

Network Support—Chapter 4157700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSB555 Watcher (760 Computers with CDMA Radios)The SB555 Watcher program is used on the 760 Computer with CDMAradios only. Use this primarily to activate the WAN radio. Once the WANradio is activiated, you can remove the SB555 Watcher program from the760 Computer.This tells you how to set up your CDMA radio in your 760 Computer.Below are terms to familiarize you with CDMA radio technology:Note: Set up and provision information is also available in the 700 ColorCDMA Radio Setup Quick Start Guide P/N: 962-054-063.Activation The process of programming the radio with the lock code (MSL) and phone number (MIN) toallow it to communicate on the provider’s network. Once activation is complete you can makevoice calls (if enabled by the carrier) with the mobile computer.Data Provisioning The process of activating the ability for the CDMA radio to establish data connections, such asconnecting to the Internet. The CDMA radio makes data connection only after it is activatedand data provisioned.NID (Network ID) A numeric value programmed into the CDMA radio at the factory or during the activationprocess. Your carrier may or may not use this value, but your carrier may provide this for ac-tivation purposes.SID (System ID) A numeric value programmed into the CDMA radio at the factory or during the activationprocess. This number is used by your carrier to determine if the radio belongs to its CDMAnetwork. Your carrier may provide this number for activation purposes.Note: Descriptions in this chapter are for Sprint PCS, Bell Mobility, Te-lus, and Verizon Networks versions of the SB555 Watcher program. Oth-er carriers may be added pending regulatory and carrier approval.Copying CDMA Radio Module CAB Files from Intermec Web SiteCopy CAB files from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com ontoyour desktop. Note that this is subject to change.1Select Service & Support >Developers Support fromthebluenaviga-tion bar on the Intermec home page.2Select 700 Color Support from the Developers Support navigation co-lumn on the left side of the screen.3Select Downloads from beneath the 700 Color Support selectionintheDevelopers Support navigation column on the left side of the screen.4Select WWAN from the center of the screen, beneath the “Downloads”title.5From beneath the “Sierra Wireless ‘Watcher’ Application” title, down-load any of the CAB files shown, then choose your carrier CAB files.Intermec recommends one of two methods with which to load these CABfiles onto your 760 Computer: via the Microsoft ActiveSync application(next paragraph) or via a CompactFlash or Secure Digital storage card(next page). See Chapter 3, “Installing Applications,” for more informationabout these methods.

Network SupportChapter —4158 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualVia Microsoft ActiveSyncYou can transfer files from your desktop to your 760 Computer via Micro-soft ActiveSync. See Chapter 2, “Windows Mobile 2003” for more infor-mation about ActiveSync.1Obtain software from the Intermec web site as described earlier. Down-load the software to any location on your 760 Computer, such as theTemp folder via the My Device root location.2Tap the carrier CAB file to install the application.3Go to “Finishing the Installation” on page 159.Via a CompactFlash or Secure Digital Storage CardNote: These instructions are based on default locations. You can changethe location to which to copy your CAB files.1Make sure the Registry Restore feature on your 760 Computer is dis-abled. Select Start >Settings >theSystem tab. Tap the Utilities desk-top icon, then the Registry Save tab. Clear the Enable Registry Savebox.2Copy the CAB files for your carrier to your CompactFlash or SecureDigital storage card after downloading it from the web site.3Cold-boot your 760 Computer. Remove the battery pack and press thereset button in the bottom of the battery compartment.4Go through the normal getting started steps detailed in your 700 ColorCDMA Radio Setup Quick Start Guide.5Install the CompactFlash or Secure Digital memory card into the cardslot in your 760 Computer. Note that if you do not want the CAB fileserased after installation, set the CAB file attributes to “read-only” after copy-ing them to the storage card.6From the 760 Computer, tap Start >Programs >theFile Explorericon.

Network Support—Chapter 4159700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual7Tap the pull-down menu for My Documents and tap the My Deviceroot location.8If you are using a CompactFlash storage card,tap Storage Card.If you are using an Secure Digital storage card,tap SDMMC Disk.9Scroll down, then tap the Sprint Watcher CAB file to install the ap-plication.10 Go to “Finishing the Installation” in the next paragraph.Finishing the InstallationDo the following to run the SB555 Watcher application. Be sure to dostep 1 as it is important to perform a warm-boot on your 760 Computer.Upon restart, the Watcher application sets up on the 760 Computer foractivation.1Tap Start >Programs >theWatcher icon.2Tap Yes, I accept to accept the license agreement, then tap OK to con-tinue. Note that this license agreement does not appear again after thisinstallation.3Tap OK for the 760 Computer to perform a warm-boot and completethe installation.

Network SupportChapter —4160 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualActivationNote: Set the date and time before doing this activation.SB555 Watcher is for activation and data provisioning. Once you enablevoice capability, data capability, or both depending on the carrier, removethis program from the system by cold-booting your computer.Intermec Technologies does not recommend using the SB555 Watcherprogram to make data and voice calls on a daily basis for these reasons:SThe SB555 Watcher application is a third-party application unaware ofcertain power management methods used in your 760 Computer.Therefore, the application consumes more power than necessary.SThe application size consumes memory better used for your applicationdata.The process of setting up the account with your carrier and enabling theCDMA WAN radio in your 760 Computer is called activation. To proper-ly function, program the CDMA device with the necessary informationand set up the network carrier account. If either piece has errors, the de-vice does not function on the CDMA network.The CDMA radio is pre-programmed for a specific carrier, such as Sprint,Telus, Bell Mobility, Verizon, etc.). Therefore, information about yourradio should already be in your carrier’s database.You need to notify the carrier and set up mobile accounts for each unityou are activating. The Electronic Serial Number (ESN hex 63xxxxxx)that you need to supply to your carrier is located in two places:SOn the outside of the 760 Computer shipping box.SOn the inside of the 760 Computer battery compartment.The ESN comes in both decimal and hexadecimal formats. Most carriersaccept either format, but with a preference for the decimal format. Youonly need to provide one number to your carrier.SThe decimal format consists of 11 digits, beginning with “099.”SThe hexadecimal format is an 8-digit number, beginning with “63.”Accounts for Verizon and Sprint carriers can be set up for data only. Cana-dian carriers (Telus and Bell Mobility) can be set for data only, voice only,or both voice and data. This is determined by your application and theservices your carrier offers.After the all ESNs are provided to the carrier and the carrier has estab-lished the accounts, you will be provided with the lock codes and tele-phone numbers needed to complete the activation process. You use theSB555 Watcher program to accomplish this task. Be sure to write down thisinformation for future use.Note: Ensure that you receive a spreadsheet with your order that calls outall ESNs in both decimal and hexadecimal formats.Note: Keep the activation information for your devices in a safe, accessibleplace should you have any future issues.

Network Support—Chapter 4161700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNote: Not all of the elements listed are required by all service providers.ESN of the modemLock/ActivationCode(maybetermedoneofthefollowing):SMSL — Master Subsidy LockSOTSL — OneTime Subsidy LockSSPC — Service Provisioning CodeSOTKSL — One Time Key Subsidy LockSID (System ID)NID (Network ID)User NamePasswordMINMSDMDNNote: The activation process for your Watcher version may vary from thefollowing steps. Thus, you may not have to do all of them.1Tap Start >Programs >theWatcher icon or tap the Watcher icon fromthe NDISTRAY via the Today screen (circled in the following illustra-tion) to launch the SB555 Watcher program.

Network SupportChapter —4162 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual2The Activation Wizard should start automatically. If not, then tapAdmin >Activation Wizard from the bottom of the screen.3Follow the screen prompts, tapping Next to move from one screen tothe next.4When you reach the Activation screen, select Manual Activation.5At the appropriate screen, enter the Activation Code (OTSL, MSL,OTKSL, or SPC) provided by your carrier and tap Next.6Enterthephonenumberprovidedwhenyour760Computerwasacti-vated and tap Next.

Network Support—Chapter 4163700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualVerizon Automated Activation ProcessNote: This process takes approximately 60 seconds.Do the following to activate Verizon on your 760 Computer:1After initializing the Watcher program, tap Yes, I accept to accept thelicense agreement, then tap OK to perform a warm-start on the 760Computer. Note this license agreement does not appear again after theinstallation.2Start the Watcher program again, select Automated Activation,thenclick Next.Note: YoumustbeintheVerizoncoverageareatoactivateyour760Computer and only in the location of intended use.

Network SupportChapter —4164 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual3Click Next,clickNext again to dial the number displayed on the screen.4The activation process starts automatically.

Network Support—Chapter 4165700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual5You will see a series of unlock codes on your screen.6The following illustration shows the result of a successful activation.

Network SupportChapter —4166 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual7Click the Connect button (circled in the following illustration) to connectto the carrier’s network.8Select Start >Internet Explorer, then choose a web site. Your unit isnow successfully activated.9Perform a cold-boot on your 760 Computer to uninstall the Watcherapplication. Watcher is intended for activation purposes only. Intermecrecommends using the following for establishing and maintaining con-nection to the WAN radio.SCustom application using Intermec WWAN Toolkit APISCustom customer application using Connection Manager InterfaceNote: When connecting to the WAN radio via Pocket PC ConnectionManager, use the 10-digit phone number@vzw3g.com for the username (such as 1234567890@vzw3g.com) and “vzw” for the password.

$Network Support—Chapter 4167700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSprint Automated Activation ProcessNote: Sprint PCS uses a data provisioning method termed IOTA (InternetOver The Air) to complete its activation and data enablement. The follow-ing steps detail how to properly activate and data provision your 760Computer.Do the following to set up activation:1Provide Sprint with your ESN, rate plan, and account information.2Sprint provides you with the following for each ESN:SMDN, such as 214-555-5555SMSID, such as 214-555-5555SMSL/OTKSL (Activation Code), such as 945614SNAI (Network Access Identifier), such as the following:CustomerNameo103@sprintpcs.comYou must use a Secure Digital storage card with only theSPRINT_WATCHER.CAB file in the “\SDMMC/Cabfiles” directory.Note: Other CAB files in the “SDMMC/Cabfiles” directory may causeproblems with testing — remove or uninstall these before proceeding.You need at least 80% (4 of 5 bars) CDMA signal strength for a successfulover-the-air activation.Download and Activate Sprint Watcher1Make sure the Registry Restore feature on your 760 Computer is dis-abled. Select Start >Settings >theSystem tab. Tap the Utilities desk-top icon, then the Registry Save tab. Clear the Enable Registry Savebox.2Perform a cold-boot on your 760 Computer, then go through the nor-mal Pocket PC set-up (i.e. Align Screen etc.).$

Network SupportChapter —4168 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual3Important! Set the Date and Time.4Tap the Sprint_Watcher_PPC_2002-03xxx.CAB file to perform theinstallation.5Perform a warm-boot on your 760 Computer to load the CAB file.6From the Today screen, tap the LAN Network icon in the System Tray(circled in the following illustration).7In the NDISTRAY pop-up menu (the Network Driver Interface Speci-fication tray application), select No Networking and Auto FTP Off.Tap anywhere on the screen to close the menu.

Network Support—Chapter 4169700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual8Tap Start >Programs >theWatcher icon or tap the Watcher icon fromthe NDISTRAY via the Today screen (circled in the following illustra-tion) to launch the SB555 Watcher program.9Tap Yes, I accept to accept the license agreement, then tap OK to con-tinue. Note that this license agreement does not appear again after thisinstallation.

Network SupportChapter —4170 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTap OK for the 760 Computer to perform a warm-boot and complete theinstallation.Using Sprint WatcherBefore you start using the Sprint Watcher application, make sure youmatch the correct ESN with each 760 Computer and that you have at least80% CDMA signal strength.1Tap Start >Programs >theWatcher icon or tap the Watcher icon fromthe NDISTRAY via the Today screen (circled in the following illustra-tion) to launch the SB555 Watcher program.

Network Support—Chapter 4171700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual2If your 760 Computer was not previously activated, Watcher automati-cally starts the Activation Wizard. Otherwise, select Manual Activationto continue.3EntertheMSLorlockcodereceivedfromSprint.

Network SupportChapter —4172 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual4Enterthephonenumber(MIN)andMSIDreceivedfromSprint.Thesenumbersmaybethesame.5After entering the phone number and MSID, the modem resets. Watch-er displays the following two screens:Note: If the “searching for SB555” screen does not proceed to the nextscreen after 30-40 seconds, perform a warm-boot on your 760 Comput-er, then restart the Watcher program.

Network Support—Chapter 4173700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualData ProvisioningAt this point, the activation on the Sprint network is complete. It is rec-ommended by Sprint to wait before you launch data provisioning to allowtime for the activation to propagate through your Sprint network.Before you manually launch data provisioning, wait at least 30 minutes. Insome cases, you may have to wait up to two hours.1If Data Provisioning does not start automatically, select Admin >DataProvisioning from the bottom menu bar.2Tap Yes to proceed with data provisioning.

Network SupportChapter —4174 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualActivation over the air typically takes 1–20 minutes.If data provisioning fails, do the following:SIf Data Provisioning fails and the message “could not prepare data ser-vices, please contact Sprint” displays, retry the Data Provisioning step bytapping the “Admin” menu icon at the bottom of the Watcher screen.Select “Data Provisioning...” and answer “yes” to the request.SIf after several attempts to complete the Data Provisioning over the air,it may be necessary to manually enter the data activation method.SGo to Intermec Knowledge Central www.intermec.com, then select Ser-vice & Support >Knowledge Central) to learn about manual activa-tion. The article (number 5749) is titled How to Manually Activate aSprint CDMA WAN Radio in the 760 Device.

Network Support—Chapter 4175700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual3The following screen appears once data provisioning is complete:4Test the data connection by tapping on the “connect” button to make adata connection to the network. Watcher progresses through the follow-ing two screens. Once you see the second screen you know that yourmobile computer has successfully connected to the 1XRTT network.

Network SupportChapter —4176 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual5Select Start >Internet Explorer, then choose a web site. Your unit isnow successfully activated.Perform a cold-boot on your 760 Computer to uninstall the Watcher ap-plication. Watcher is intended for activation purposes only. Intermec rec-ommends using the following for establishing and maintaining connectionto the WAN radio.SCustom application using Intermec WWAN Toolkit APISCustom customer application using Connection Manager InterfaceTelus and Bell Mobility ActivationActivation of Bell Mobility and Telus are similar to the first portion of theSprint activation process. Follow the instructions for manual activationusing the Bell Mobility Watcher.CAB or Telus Watcher.CAB file to installthe applicable application. Enter the activation lock codes and phone num-bers as requested.Username, Password, SID InformationBell Mobility TelusUsername 10 digit phonenumber@1xbell.ca10-digit phonenumber@1x.telusmobility.comPassword Original Voice Mail system pass-word (usually a 4 digit number)This is available from the activat-ing organization.The 11-digit ESN printed insidethe 760 Computer batterycompartment, begins with 099.SID 16420 16422

Network Support—Chapter 4177700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAT Command Interface (760 Computers)This interface specification is based on the following recommendation:SETSI GSM 07.05:European Digital Cellular Telecommunication System (phase 2)Use of DTE-DCE interface for Short message and cell broadcast service.SETSI GSM 07.07:European Digital Cellular Telecommunication System (phase 2)AT command set for GSM Mobile Equipment.SITU-T Recommendation V.25 terSerial asynchronous automatic dialing and control.Note: You need the Adobe Acrobat Reader application to view a PDF do-cument. Go to www.adobe.com/prodindex/acrobat/readstep.html to installor download the latest Adobe Acrobat Reader.Command Set for Sierra Wireless SB555Use the AT command interface from Sierra Wireless to program theCDMA/1xRTT SB555 radio module. Documentation for this interface isavailable via the following URL. Click the “General AT command refer-ence” link for a PDF document, which is 680 KB in size. Note that thisURL is subject to change.www.sierrawireless.com/ProductsOrdering/embedded_docs.htmlCommand Set for Siemens MC45 or MC46Use the MC45 or MC46 AT command interface from Siemens AG toprogram the GPRS/GSM MC45 or MC46 radio module. The “MC45Siemens Cellular Engine AT Command Set”andthe“MC46 Siemens Cellu-lar Engine AT Command Set” are available either from Intermec Technolo-gies or from Siemens AG. Contact either your Intermec representative orthe Siemens AG support personnel at the following URL for more infor-mation. Note this URL is subject to change.www.siemens-mobile.com/btob/CDA/presentation/ap_btob_cda_presenta-tion_frontdoor/0,2950,12,FF.html

Network SupportChapter —4178 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTesting the AT CommandsThese commands can be sent to either WAN radio by setting up a dial-upnetworking connection to COM4. Do the following to initiate this con-nection and test these commands to your radio:1From the 760 Computer, select Start >Settings >theConnections tab>Connections.UnderMy ISP,tapAdd a new modem connection.2Enter a name for the connection, select “WANA on COM4” from theSelect a modem drop-down list, then tap Next to continue.

Network Support—Chapter 4179700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual3Enter a phone number as it should be dialed, then tap Next to continue.Select Start >Help for more information or tap use dialing rules tomake modifications. Note that this screen may vary based on dialing rules.4Tap Advanced to continue.

Network SupportChapter —4180 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual5Select “115200” from the Baud rate drop-down list via the Generalpage.6Tap the Port Settings tab, check Enter dialing commands manually,then tap ok,thenFinish to return to the Connections screen.

Network Support—Chapter 4181700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual7Tap Manage existing connections from the Connections page, pressand hold the new connection for a pop-up menu, then tap Connect toinitiate the connection.8Wait about ten seconds for the Network Log On screen, then tap OK.Note: You do not need to enter any information within the Network LogOn screen.Useeithertheonscreenkeyboard,orpressthekeystotypeanyoftheATcommands provided. Press or tap Enter to send each command. The re-sults of each command sent will print onscreen. Note that each “AT” com-mand must start with the “at” characters.STo see what you typed onscreen, type “ate1” to initiate the AT Echocommand, then press Enter.

$Network SupportChapter —4182 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWireless Personal Area Networking“Bluetooth” is the name given to a technology standard using short-rangeradio links, intended to replace the cables connecting portable and fixedelectronic devices. The standard defines a uniform structure for a widerange of devices to communicate with each other, with minimal user ef-fort. Its key features are robustness, low complexity, low power, and lowcost. The technology also offers wireless access to LANs, the mobile phonenetwork, and the internet for a host of home appliances and portablehand-held interfaces.DocumentationInformation about other Bluetooth software is in the Wireless PrintingSDK and the Wireless Printing Development Guide (on the Intermec Devel-oper’s Library CD, via the “\Wireless Printing SDK” directory off the root).About the ApplicationBluetooth is not started automatically by default after a cold-boot is per-formed. To run Bluetooth, tap Start >Settings >theConnections tab >the Bluetooth icon. The 700 Color Computer retains the Bluetooth statewhen warm-boots are performed, for example:SIf Bluetooth is active, and a warm-boot was performed, the 700 ColorComputer boots up with the Bluetooth state activated and Bluetoothvirtual COM ports (such as printing) registered. However, you mustreactivate connections, as the system does not do these automatically.SIf Bluetooth is inactive, and a warm-boot was performed, the 700 ColorComputer boots up with Bluetooth deactivated.ModeThe default tab activates or deactivates Bluetooth. When Bluetooth is acti-vated, the 700 Color Computer can discover and connect to remote de-vices.700 Color Screen 730 Screen$

Network Support—Chapter 4183700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWireless PrintingUse this tab to print via Bluetooth devices. Tap Device Discovery to disco-ver (or scan) for remote Bluetooth devices. When the 700 Color Comput-er is finished scanning, any newly discovered devices appear in the upperDevices box.Tap Clear Devices to remove the list from the Devices box.To print to a Bluetooth device, select any of the devices listed in theDevices box, then tap Connect. Once connected, the selected devicemoves to the lower Connected box.To view connection information or register a COM port for a device,from the lower Connected box, select a device, then tap Properties.See“Properties” on the next page for information.When done printing to a device, select that device in the Connected box,then tap Disconnect. This moves the device in question back to the upperDevices box.PropertiesSelect a COM Port from the Choose COM Port box to register for thisdevice, then check Enable Wireless Printing to complete the COM portregistration. To change your COM port selection, clear (uncheck) the En-able Wireless Printing box, select a new COM port, then check EnableWireless Printing again. Check Default COM ports that already are in useare grayed out.When you enable Wireless Printing, a status message is shown near thebottom of the screen to confirm your action. To print a test page to yourprinter, tap PrintTestPage.Check Default to set this printer to identify the assigned COM Port as theWPPort in the registry. See the Wireless Printing Development Guide formore details on WPPort.

Network SupportChapter —4184 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTap ok to return to the Wireless Printing page.File TransferUsethispagetoenableyourunittoreceivefilesfromanotherBluetoothdevice, or from any device that supports this function.Note that this does not apply to the 730 Computer. From this point, thistransfer is similar to an IrDA file transfer. To transfer a file, tap Start >Programs >File Explorer and locate the file to transfer. Press and hold onthefileforapop-upmenu,thenselectBeam File.

Network Support—Chapter 4185700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualThe system searches for a list of Bluetooth devices that will accept a con-nection from your unit. When the list is complete, tap on a device towhich to send the file. Note: in some cases, the user of the target device has to“accept” the file before it is transmitted.

$Network SupportChapter —4186 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAutoIP/DHCPAutomatic Private IP Addressing (AutoIP) is enabled by default inWindows Mobile 2003. To remain compatible with other versions ofPocket PC, this setting needs to be enabled. You can configure the registrysettings in the following to set the required AutoIP/DHCP behavior:SFor Ethernet:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Comm\LAN9001\TcpIpSFot 802.11:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Comm\NETWLAN1\TcpIpOther registry keys that can modify the behavior of AutoIP are as follows.You can find the appropriate settings and behavior of each of these keys inMicrosoft Help.SAutoIntervalSAutoMaskSAutoSubnetSAutoIPSAutoSeedWhen a TCP/IP client cannot find a DHCP server, it generates an AutoIPaddress from the 169.254.xxx.xxx block. The client then tries to check fora DHCP server every 15 seconds and if a DHCP server is found, the clientdrops the AutoIP address and uses the address from the DHCP server.In the MSDN Windows CE documentation available out on the Micro-soft Developer Network web site (www.msdn.com), see “Automatic ClientConfiguration” for more information on AutoIP.To disable AutoIP, set the AutoCfg registry entry to “0.” If a DHCP serv-er cannot be found, instead of using AutoIP, the system will display the“Unable to obtain a server assigned IP address” message.Note: If you try to disable AutoIP using a CAB file to set the registry valuefor AutoIP, remember to set the EnableDHCP value to “1” to keepDHCP enabledNote: To extend the number of attempts that a DHCP client makes to geta DHCP address, use the DhcpRetryDialogue and DhcpMaxRetry registrysettings.Note: Change the AutoInterval registry key value to make the client retrymoreoftentoobtainaDHCPaddress.$

Network Support—Chapter 4187700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSNMP Configuration on the 700 Color ComputerIn short, SNMP is an application-layer protocol that facilitates the ex-change of management information between network devices. The 700Color Computer is such an SNMP-enabled device. Use SNMP to controland configure the 700 Color Computer anywhere on an SNMP-enablednetwork.The 700 Color Computer supports four proprietary Management Infor-mation Bases (MIBs) and Intermec Technologies provides SNMP supportfor MIB-II through seven read-only MIB-II (RFC1213-MIB) ObjectIdentifiers (OIDs).Note: You can only query these seven OIDs through an SNMP manage-ment station.Management Information BaseThe Management Information Base is a database that contains informationabout the elements to be managed. The information identifies the manage-ment element and specifies its type and access mode (Read-Only, Read-Write). MIBs are written in ASN.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation.1) — a ma-chine independent data definition language. Note: Elements to be managedare represented by objects. The MIB is a structured collection of such objects.You will find the following MIB files either in the 700 Color ManagementTools portion of the Intermec Developer’s Library CD or on the web viawww.intermec.com:SINTERMEC.MIBDefines the root of the Intermec MIB tree.SITCADC.MIBDefines objects for Automated Data Collection (ADC), such as barcode symbologies.SITCSNMP.MIBDefines objects for Intermec SNMP parameters and security methods,such as an SNMP security IP address.SITCTERMINAL.MIBDefines objects for 700 Color parameters, such as key clicks.

Network SupportChapter —4188 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualObject IdentifiersEach object has a unique identifier called an OID, which consist of a se-quence of integer values represented in dot notation. Objects are stored ina tree structure and OIDs are assigned based on the position of the objectin the tree. For example, the internet OID is equal to 1.3.6.1. Seven MIBOIDsareshowninthefollowingtable:MIB Object IdentifiersMIB-II Item OID Group or Table DescriptionifNumber 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1.0 Interfaces Group Indicates the number of adapterspresent in the system. For the 700Color Computer, if one adapter ispresent in the system, then ifNum-ber =1andifIndex=1.ifIndex 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.ifIndex Interfaces Table (ifTable) A unique value for each interface.The value ranges between 1 and thevalue of ifNumber.ifDescr 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.2.ifIndex Interfaces Table (ifTable) A textual string containing informa-tion about the interface.ifType 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.3.ifIndex Interfaces Table (ifTable) An integer containing informationabout the type of the interface. It isequal to 1 for Other.ipAdEntAddr 1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.1.IpAddress IP address Table(ipAddrTable)The IP address to which this entry’saddressing information pertains(same as 700 IP address),whereIPAddressisthevalidnon-zeroIPad-dress of the 700 Color Computer.ipAdEntIfIndex 1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.2.IpAddress IP address Table(ipAddrTable)Theindexvaluethatuniquelyiden-tifies the interface to which thisentry is applicable (same as ifIndex).ipAdEntNetMask 1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.3.IpAddress IP address Table(ipAddrTable)The subnet mask associated withtheIPaddressofthisentry(same asSubnet Mask).Configuring with SNMPThe community string allows an SNMP manager to manage the 700 Col-or Computer with a specified privilege level. The default read-only com-munity string is “public” and “private” is the default read/write communi-ty string. See the specific configuration parameter to find its OID. Toconfigure the 700 Color Computers using SNMP:1Configure700ColorComputersforRForEthernetcommunications.2Determine the OID (Object Identifier) for the parameter to be chan-ged. The Intermec base OID is 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.3Use your SNMP management station to get and set variables that aredefined in the Intermec MIBs. You can set the traps, identification, orsecurity configuration parameters for SNMP. See Appendix A, “Confi-gurable Settings,” to learn more about these parameters.

189700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPrinter Support5The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer works with the following printersfrom Intermec Technologies. Contact an Intermec representative for infor-mation about these printers.S6820A full-page, 80-column printer.S6808A 4-inch belt-mount printer.SPB20A 2-inch belt-mount printer with a Bluetooth compatible module fromSocket Communications.S782TA 2-inch workboard printer.Note: “700 Color” pertains to 740, 741, 750, 751, 760, and 761 Com-puters unless otherwise noted.

Printer SupportChapter —5190 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPrinting ASCIIThe following methods for printing using Pocket PC at this time is as fol-lows:SAdd port drivers to print ASCII directly to the port.SUse LinePrinter ActiveX Control from the Software Developer’s Kit(SDK) — see the SDK User’s Manual for more information.SVia wireless printing - see the Wireless Printing Development Guide on theIntermec Developer’s Library CD for more information.Directly to a PortPrinting directly to the port sends RAW data to the printer. The format ofthis data depends upon your application and the printer capabilities.Youmustunderstandtheprintercommandsavailableforyourspecificprinter. Generally, applications just send raw ASCII text to the printer.Since you are sending data to the printer from your application directly tothe port you are in complete control of the printers operations. This allowsyoutodolineprinting(printonelineatatime)rather than the page for-mat printing offered by the GDI approach. It is also much faster since datadoes not have to be converted from one graphics format to the other (dis-play to printer). Most Intermec®printers use Epson Escape Sequences tocontrol print format operations.These commands are available in documentation you receive with yourprinters or from technical support. Win32 APIs are required to print di-rectly to the port.Directly to a Generic Serial PortTo print directly to a generic serial port printer (non-Intermec printers):SUse CreateFile() to open ports — COM1 can be opened on most de-vices.SUse WriteFile() to send data directly to the printer.SUse CloseHandle() when you are finished printing to close the port.IrDA Printer DriverIrDA printing is only available on the certain devices and is supported di-rectly by the Windows CE load via the IrSock API provided by the Micro-soft Win32 API without need for additional drivers. Intermec 6804, 6805,6806, 6808 and 6820 and other IrDA printers are supported.

$Printer Support—Chapter 5191700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNPCP Printer DriverThe NPCP printer communications driver (NPCPPORT.DLL) is aStream Device Driver built into the operating system. The driver supportsonly NPCP communications to and from the 6820 and 4820 printers overa selected serial port.All applications use WIN32 API functions to access the drivers. Basic op-erations are easily implemented by applications through the CreateFile(),WriteFile(), ReadFile(), DeviceIOControl(), and CloseHandle() Win32APIs.Operations to upgrade printer modules, perform printer diagnostics, andget printer configuration are performed largely via DeviceIOControl()functions.About NPCPNPCP (Norand®Portable Communications Protocol) is a proprietaryprotocol that provides session, network, and datalink services for Intermecmobile computers in the Intermec LAN environment used with printersand data communications.NPCP Driver Installation and RemovalUseLPT9:fortheNPCPprinterdeviceandCOM1forthelastparame-ter. COM1 is the connection available via the 700 Color Computer.Applications use the RegisterDevice() function to install the driver.DeregisterDevice() uninstalls the device driver and frees memory spacewhen the driver is not required. Use the HANDLE returned byRegisterDevice() as the parameter to DeregisterDevice().Use the RegisterDevice() function call as demonstrated below. Specify thefull path name to the driver starting at the root for the RegisterDevice()function to work properly. The last parameter to RegisterDevice() is aDWORD that represents the name of the port for the NPCP streamdriver to use. Build this parameter on the stack if it is not to be paged outduringthecall.Thefirstparameter“LPT”(DeviceName)andthesecondparameter “9’ (index), indicate the name of the registered device, such asLPT9. This is used in the CreateFile() function call.Install(){HANDLE hDevice;TCHAR port[6];port[0] = TCHAR(‘C’);port[1] = TCHAR(‘O’);port[2] = TCHAR(‘M’);port[3] = TCHAR(‘1’);port[4] = TCHAR(‘:’);port[5] = TCHAR(0);hDevice = RegisterDevice ( (TEXT(”LPT”), 9,TEXT(“\\STORAGE CARD\\WINDOWS\\NPCPPORT.dll”), (DWORD)port);}$

Printer SupportChapter —5192 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualOpening the NPCP DriverTheapplicationopenstheNPCPdriverbyusingtheCreateFile()function. The call can be implemented as follows. The first parameter“LPT9:”mustreflectthedevicenameandindexusedintheRegisterDevice() function call and will fail for any of the following reasons:hFile = CreateFile(_T(”LPT9:”), GENERIC_WRITE |GENERIC_READ, 0, NULL, OPEN_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL,NULL);SThe port associated with the device during RegisterDevice() is in use.SThe NPCP device is already open.SThe share mode is not set to zero. The device cannot be shared.SAccess permissions are not set to GENERIC_WRITE |GENERIC_READ. Both modes must be specified.Closing the NPCP DriverUsing the CloseHandle() (hFile) function closes the NPCP driver. WherehFile is the handle returned by the CreateFile() function call.STRUE = the device is successfully closed.SFALSE = an attempt to close NULL HANDLE or an already closed de-vice.Reading from the NPCP DriverReading of the NPCP printers is not supported since all responses fromthe printer are the result of commands sent to the printer.DeviceIoControl() functions are provided where data is to be receivedfrom the printer.Writing to the NPCP DriverAll Print data can be sent to the printer using the WriteFile() function.The print data written to the driver must contain the proper printercommands for formatting. If the function returns FALSE, the NPCP errormay be retrieved using IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR. See the description onthe next page.

Printer Support—Chapter 5193700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNPCP Driver I/O ControlsAn application uses the DeviceIoControl() function to specify an printeroperation to be performed. Certain I/O controls are required to bind andclose communication sessions with the printer, and must be completedbefore any other commands to the driver can execute properly.The function returns TRUE to indicate the device successfully completedits specified I/O control operation, otherwise it returns FALSE. Thefollowing I/O control codes are defined:#define IOCTL_NPCP_CANCELCTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x400,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)#define IOCTL_NPCP_BINDCTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x401,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)#define IOCTL_NPCP_CLOSECTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x402,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)#define IOCTL_NPCP_ERRORCTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x403,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)#define IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSHCTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x404,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)#define IOCTL_NPCP_IOCTLCTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x405,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)#define IOCTL_NPCP_PRTVERCTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x406,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)SIOCTL_NPCP_CANCELThis cancels all printing at the printer. It flushes the printer buffers andreinitializes the printer to its default state. No parameters are required.SIOCTL_NPCP_BINDThis command is required before any data is sent or received by theprinter. Once the driver is opened, the application must bind the com-munications session with the printer before any data can be sent or re-ceived by the printer. If an error occurs during the bind, the applicationmay use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the current extended errorcode. No parameters are required.SIOCTL_NPCP_CLOSEThis command closes the current session with the printer. This functionalways returns TRUE. No parameters are required.SIOCTL_NPCP_ERRORThis command returns the extended NPCP error code in PL/N format.The word returned will contain the PL/N compatible error code in thelow byte and completion flags in the high byte. If the frame that re-turned an error was not received correctly by the printer theFRAME_NOT_ACKED bit will be set in the high byte. This operationalways returns TRUE. An output buffer of at least 2 bytes is required.See “NPCP Error Codes” on page 195.SIOCTL_NPCP_FLUSHThis command allows the application to poll the printer for errors whilethe report is completing the print process at the printer. If an error oc-curs during the polling process, the operation will return FALSE andthe application can get the extended error code by usingIOCTL_NPCP_ERROR. No parameters are required.

$Printer SupportChapter —5194 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNPCP Printer CommunicationsAll NPCP printer communications should be based on the following flow:1Use CreateFile(); to open the printer driver.2Use IOCTL_NPCP_BIND to bind a session with the printer;IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to check for errors on the bind to ensure suc-cess; and IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL to cancel any outstanding printjobs.3Use IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer to free up printer buff-er resources. Use IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer’s status. Ifan error is reported by the IOCTL, then use IOCTL_NPCP_ERRORto get the error and determine the correct recovery procedure.4Use WriteFile(); to write your data to the printer. Check for errors andthat all data were written. Use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the ex-tended error. If the error is critical in nature, useIOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE, followed by CloseFile(), to end the commu-nications session. Start a new session, beginning with step 1 to ensureproper printing. For noncritical errors display the error and retry theoperation.5After all data is sent to the printer, ensure that the printer continues toprint the report properly by polling the printer’s status. UseIOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer’s status. If an error is re-ported by the IOCTL, then use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get theerror and determine the correct recovery procedure.Sample CodeSee sample code in the “\700C Dev Tools\Installable Drivers\PortDrivers\Npcp\NPCPPrint\” directory for more details on printing, printercommunications and error code handling.$

Printer Support—Chapter 5195700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNPCP Error CodesCall the IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR I/O control function to receive PL/Ncompatible error codes. Applications must decide how to act upon the datareturned.// Definition of NPCP communications Errors and Printer Errors#define PNRDY (BYTE)102 // link not ready error#define RXTMO (BYTE)104 // link no receive error#define TXTMO (BYTE)106 // link no transmit error#define BADADR (BYTE)111 // frame address error#define GAPERR (BYTE)112 // link gap error (timeout) in receive data#define LSRPE (BYTE)113 // frame parity error on length field#define IFTS (BYTE)120 // session layer - invalid frame this state#define NS_NE_VR (BYTE)121 // session layer sequence error#define NR_NE_VS (BYTE)122 // session layer sequence error#define MAC_CRCERR (BYTE)124 // MAC CRC error#define RLENERR (BYTE)123 // MAC too much data received#define FRMERR (BYTE)200 // Frame Reject#define FRMERR_IF (BYTE)201 // Frame Reject - Invalid Frame#define FRMERR_NR (BYTE)202 // Frame Reject - NR Mismatch#define FRMERR_NS (BYTE)203 // Frame Reject - NS Mismatch#define NDMERR (BYTE)204 // Normal Disconnect mode error#define BINDERR (BYTE)210 // bind error#define IPLDUR (BYTE)221 // invalid presentation layer response#define HEADJAM (BYTE)222 // printer head jam#define PAPEROUT (BYTE)223 // printer paper out#define LOWVOLTS (BYTE)224 // printer low voltage#define HIVOLTS (BYTE)225 // printer over voltage#define LOWBAT (BYTE)226 // printer low battery#define COVEROFF (BYTE)227 // printer cover off error#define HEADFAULT (BYTE)228 // printer head short or driver short error#define PFFAULT (BYTE)229 // paper feed motor fault.#define FRAME_NOT_ACKED 0x8000 // frame was not received by printer and needto be resent.

$Printer SupportChapter —5196 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualO’Neil Printer DriverThe DTR printer communications driver is a Stream Device Drivernamed ONEIL.DLL.All applications use WIN32 API functions to access drivers. Basicoperations are easily implemented by applications through theCreateFile(), WriteFile(), DeviceIOControl() and CloseHandle() Win32APIs.The driver supports communications to 6804DM, 6804T, 6805A, 6806,6808, 681T, and PB20 printers over a selected serial port.DTR Driver Installation and RemovalYour application must install the device driver by using the RegisterDe-vice() function. The driver name is ONEIL.DLL. We recommend thatyou use “DTR” for the Device Name parameter, “1” for the Device Driv-er index parameter, and use any of the following strings for the last param-eter:SNULL (==0) Defaults to COM1 @ 9600S“COM1” only COM port specified defaults to 9600S“COM1:9600” sets to COM port and specified bit rateS“COM1:19200” sets to COM port and specified bit rateUse the HANDLE returned by RegisterDevice() as the parameter toDeregisterDevice(). The correct usage of the RegisterDevice() function callis demonstrated below. You may use DeregisterDevice() to uninstall thedriver.Install(){HANDLE hDevice;TCHAR port[6];port[0] = TCHAR(‘C’);port[1] = TCHAR(‘O’);port[2] = TCHAR(‘M’);port[3] = TCHAR(‘1’);port[4] = TCHAR(‘:’);port[5] = TCHAR(0);hDevice = RegisterDevice ( (TEXT(”DTR”), 1, TEXT(”\\WINDOWS\\ONEIL.DLL”),(DWORD)port);}$

Printer Support—Chapter 5197700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualOpening the DTR DriverThe application opens the DTR driver by using the CreateFile() function.The call can be implemented as follows:hFile = CreateFile(_T(”DTR1:”), GENERIC_WRITE, 0, NULL,OPEN_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL);The first parameter “DTR1:” must reflect the device name and index usedin the RegisterDevice() function call.The function call will fail for any of the following reasons:SThe port associated with the device during RegisterDevice() is currentlyin use.SThe DTR device is already open.SThe share mode is not set to zero. The device cannot be shared.SAccess permissions are not set to GENERIC_WRITE.Closing the DTR DriverUsing the CloseHandle() (hFile) function closes the DTR driver. WherehFile is the handle returned by the CreateFile() function call.STRUE indicates the device is successfully closed.SFALSE indicates an attempt to close a NULL HANDLE or an alreadyclosed device.Writing to the DTR DriverYou can use the WriteFile() function to send all Print data to the printer.The print data being written must contain the proper formatting printercommands.DTR Printer CommunicationsAll DTR printer communications should be based on the following flow:1Use CreateFile() to open the printer driver.2Use WriteFile() to write your data to the printer. Check for errors andthat all data were written.3Use CloseHandle() to close the driver.

Printer SupportChapter —5198 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

199700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualScanner Support6The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer is available with imaging or laserscanning technologies, including the following:APS Linear Imager:(standard for 730 Computers)— includes the EV10 Scan EngineReads 1D symbologies and PDF417 bar codes. Linear imag-ing using Vista Scanning technology reads low-contrast barcodes, laminated bar codes, and bar codes displayed on CRTor TRT displays. This imaging uses harmless LEDs for illu-mination and does not require any warning labels. Vista Scan-ning is more reliable than lasers as it is a completely solid statewith no moving parts or oscillating mirrors.2D Imager:(not supported on 730 Computers)— includes the IT4000 Scan EngineThis decodes several stacked 1D and 2D symbologies, includ-ing PDF417, Data Matrix, and MaxiCode without “paint-ing.” It can also read 1D codes from any orientation, for ex-ample the scan beam does not need to align perpendicular tothe symbol to read it. Photography is a secondary application;the lens in the device favors bar code reading. Photos are640x480, 256 gray-scale.1D Laser Scanner:(not supported on 730 Computers)— includes the SE900, SE900HS, SE900-S6, andSE900HS-S6 scan enginesTraditional laser scanner that decodes 1D bar codes.PDF417 Laser Scanner:(not supported on730 Computers)Higher speed laser scanner that can read PDF417 labels by“painting” the label.A 700 Color Imager Demo application demonstrates the more commonfeatures of the 700 Color Computer imager. See the Imager Demo V1.0User’s Guide on the Intermec Developer’s Library CD for information.Note: “700 Color” pertains to 740, 741, 750, 751, 760, and 761 Com-puters unless otherwise noted.

Scanner SupportChapter —6200 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualScanner Control and Data TransferNote: To use the methods described below, enable Data Collection func-tionality on the 700 Computer using the bootloader configuration menu.The Data Server and associated software provide several ways to manipu-late scanner control and data transfer between the scanner subsystem anduser applications:SAutomatic Data Collection COM Interfaces:These COM interfaces allow user applications to receive bar code data,and configure and control the bar code reader engine.SITCAxBarCodeReaderControl functions:These ActiveX controls allow user applications to collect bar code datafrom the scanner, to configure the scanner, and to configure audio andvisual notification when data arrives.SITCAxReaderCommand functions:Use these ActiveX controls to modify and retrieve configuration infor-mation using the reader interface commands.SScanning EasySet bar code labels:You can use the EasySetRbar code creation software from IntermecTechnologies Corporation to print configuration labels. Scan the labelsto change the scanner configuration and data transfer settings.Use the Intermec EasySet software to print configuration labels you canscan to change your configuration settings. For more information, seethe EasySet online help. EasySet is available from the Intermec DataCapture web site.For more information, see the SDK User’s Manual provided with yourWindows CE/PocketPC SDK.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter201700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualData Collection ConfigurationFor Units with PSM Builds Older than 3.00Scanner settings for the 700 Color Computer can be configured via theData Collection control panel applet. From the 700 Color Computer, tapStart >Settings >theSystem tab > Data Collection.SeeAppendix A,“Configurable Settings” for more information about the following parame-ters. Note that these are in alphabetical order.SCodabar (page 298)SCode 11 (page 312)SCode 128 (page 301)SCode 128 Options (page 302)SCode 128 FNC1 Character (page 303)SCode 39 (page 296)SCode 93 (page 300)SCode 93 Length (page 300)SData Matrix (page 314)SInterleaved 2 of 5 (page 309)SMatrix 2 of 5 (page 310)SMaxiCode (page 315)SMSI (page 305)SPDF417 (page 306)SMacro PDF (page 306)SMicro PDF417 (page 308)SPlessey (page 304)SQR Code (page 313)SStandard 2 of 5 (page 297)STelepen (page 311)SUPC/EAN (page 299)For Units With PSM Build 3.00 or NewerYou can configure scanner settings for the 700 Color Computer via theIntermec Settings control panel applet. From the 700 Color Computer,tap Start >Settings >theSystem tab>theIntermec Settings icon. See theIntermec Computer Command Reference Manual (P/N: 073529) for infor-mation about the settings you can configure with this applet. This onlinemanual is available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com.

Scanner SupportChapter —6202 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualInternal ScannersThe Intermec Internal Scanner feature allows Automatic Data Collection(ADC) by accepting data from the COM1 port and wedging it into thekeyboard interface. You can enable or disable this feature from the Todayscreen on the 700 Color Computer.For Units With PSM Build 3.00 or NewerDo the following before you configure your internal scanner from the In-termec Settings control panel applet. Information about the settings youcan configure with this applet is described in the Intermec Computer Com-mand Reference Manual. The online manual is available from the Intermecweb site at www.intermec.com.1From the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings >theSystem tab >the Intermec Settings icon.2Tap the Scanners, Symbologies option, then tap (+) to expand InternalScanner.This sample screen is for the IT4000 scan engine.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter203700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualScanner and Imager SettingsDepending on what is selected as the scanner model, image settings, de-code security, scanner settings, and virtual wedge are configured from theIntermec Settings applet. See the the Intermec Computer Command Refer-ence Manual, available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com,for more information about each enabled option.Internal Scanner Supported SymbologiesSee the following table for a guideline and Appendix B, “Bar Code Symbol-ogies” for more information on each supported symbology:Symbologies EV10 IT4000 SE900 SE900HS SE900-S6 SE900HS-S6Code39 XX X X X XUPC/EAN X X X X X XCode 128 XX X X X XInterleaved 2 of 5 X X X X X XCode 93 XX X X X XCodabar X X X X X XCode 2 of 5 XX X X X XMSI X X X X X XPlessey XX X X X XCode 11 X X X X X XMatrix 2 of 5 XX X X X XTelepen X X X X X XPDF417 XX X X X XMicro PDF417 X X X X X XMaxiCode XData Matrix XQR Code XRSS 14 X X X X Available in f/wSxxp304Available in f/wSxxp304RSS Limited XX X XAvailableinf/wSxxp304Available in f/wSxxp304RSS Expanded X X X X Available in f/wSxxp304Available in f/wSxxp304Codablock A XX X X X XCodablock F X X X X X XUCC Composite X

Scanner SupportChapter —6204 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTethered ScannersThe Intermec Tethered Scanner feature allows Automatic Data Collection(ADC) by accepting data from the COM1 port and wedging it into thekeyboard interface. You can enable or disable this feature from the Todayscreen on the 700 Color Computer.The following information is divided between units with PSM Builds old-er than 3.00 (next paragraph) or units with PSM Builds 3.00 or newer(starting on page 209).For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3.00Enabling and DisablingOn the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Today. Tap the bar code scan-nericonintheSystemTray(circled below). Initially, the bar code scannericon indicates that this feature is disabled (shown to the left).SSelect Comm Port Wedge to send any data, coming into the 700 ColorComputer through the COM1 port from an external input device, askeyboard data to an application on the desktop.For example, if you have Pocket Word running on your 700 ColorComputer desktop, information scanned with a scanner connected tothe COM1 port appears in the Word document. If another data collec-tion application is running and is active on the 700 Color Computer,the scanned information appears in that application.Note: When Comm Port Wedge is selected, regardless of the data sentby the external input device, you cannot control the device or the dataformat using any of the Intermec scanner control or data transfer APIsfrom the SDK or the internal Data Collection software. The externalinputdeviceisgovernedbywhatsoftwareithasonboardtotellithowto scan, take pictures, or send the data elsewhere.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter205700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSSelect 1551/1553 to enable the Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered Scannerto scan, then send data as keyboard data. The 1551/1553 TetheredScanner has software onboard that translates scanned data into charac-ters, so the running/active application does not need to know how to dothat. All the scanner control and data transfer APIs will work with the1551/1553 Tethered Scanner, so you can control the device.SSelect Disable All to disable this feature and use the COM1 port foranother application, such as ActiveSync. An error message will result ifthis option were not selected, but this action was attempted. Similarly, ifActiveSync is using the COM1 port, and you select Comm Port Wedgeor 1551/1553, an error message will result. See “Error Message”formore information.Error MessageIf the COM1 port is used by another application, such as ActiveSync, nei-ther the Comm Port Wedge nor the 1551/1553 Tethered Scanner can beenabled. As a result, the following message may appear. Note that this mes-sage is for the Comm Port Wedge. You must disable that application to freeuptheCOM1portbeforeyoucanenableeitherthewedgeorthescanner.Changing Comm SettingsTap Change Comm Settings to configure the settings for the COM1port. Current settings are restored after a warm-boot is performed, but arelost after a cold-boot is performed. When these settings are not changed,the OK button is disabled (grayed out). When changes are made, tap OKafter it is enabled to accept these changes.SBaud Rate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,115200SData Bits:7or8SParity: None, Odd, Even, Mark, SpaceSStop Bits:1or2SFlow Control: None or Hardware

Scanner SupportChapter —6206 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTethered ScannerDefault settings for the Tethered Scanner are shown in this illustration:Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered ScannerThe default communication configuration for the Sabre 1551E or 1553Tethered Scanner is shown in the following illustration. Scan the EasySetReset Factory Defaults label to set the Sabre 1551E or 1553 tethered scan-ner communications settings to this configuration. The COM1 port con-figuration settings must also match those of the scanner to scan labels.Welch Allyn 1470 Imager SettingsYou can set the Welch Allyn 1470 Imager to this configuration by scan-ning the Factory Default Settings label.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter207700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualScanner CablingA null modem cable is required for the Welch Allyn 1470 Imager to com-municate with the 700 Color Computer when using the 700 Color SerialCable (P/N: 226-999-001).Sabre 1551E / 1553 Cables connect directly to the Model 700 COM Port.Limitations and CapabilitiesThe Tethered Scanner has the following limitations:SNo auto detection of a scanner’s physical connection to COM1 port.User needs to ensure the communication settings of COM1 portmatched the settings of the device.SThe Pocket PC Pocket Office applications misbehave when controlcharacters such as carriage return are wedged. This is a known PocketPC problem, which is being worked with Microsoft and for which awork around is being developed.SCommunications port is COM1 and cannot be changed.SA complete bar code label is detected when the time between bytes (theinter-byte gap) exceeds 100 ms. This allows that data could be concate-nated if two labels were received while the Comm Port Wedge or the1551/1553 Tethered Scanner was not performing a read. That is, itcould be wedging data just read or the read thread could be preempted.Also, the labels could appear concatenated if the scanner itself were tobuffer the labels before transmitting them.When enabled, the “Comm Port Wedge” menu option has this limitation:SThereisnobarcodeAPItogetbarcodedatafromthebarcodescan-ner. The Comm Port Wedge transmits the data through the keyboardinterface only.When enabled, the “1551/1553” menu option has these capabilities:SGrid Data Editing is available.SThe source of the symbology configurations is only available via theEasy Set command labels. You can only configure the Virtual Wedgeconfigurations via the Data Collection control panel applet VirtualWedge page. See Appendix A, “Configurable Settings,” for information.SMay transmit the data through the keyboard interface (via the VirtualWedge).

$Scanner SupportChapter —6208 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSThe bar code APIs, defined in the IADC interface, are available to getbarcodedatafromthebarcodescanner.Thefollowingexampleshowshow to programmatically collects bar code data:#include “IADC.h” // Linked with ITCUUID.LIB#include “ITCAdcMgmt.h” // Linked with ITCAdcDevMgmt.libIADC* pIADC;HRESULT hrStatus = S_OK;// Create a ADC COM interface to collect bar code data from the 1551E/1553// when the 1551/1553 menu option is enabled.hrStatus =ITCDeviceOpen(TEXT(“ExtScanner”), // Name of the ADC device.IID_IADC, // COM interface to returnITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEAD, // Device’s Flags(LPVOID *) &pIADC); // the returned interfaceif( SUCCEEDED(hrStatus) ){BYTE byteBuffer[MAX_LABEL_SIZE];DWORD dwLength = 0;HRESULT hr = pIDC->Read(byteBuffer, // Buffer to put the ADC data.MAX_LABEL_SIZE, // Size of pDataBuffer in bytes.&dwLength, // Number bytes returned.NULL, // Time stamp of the received data. NULL.INFINITE // Number of milliseconds to wait.);}when done using this COM interface, delete it:ITCDeviceClose( (IUnknown **) pIADC);$

6 Scanner Support—Chapter209700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualFor Units With PSM Build 3.00 or NewerConfiguring the Tethered ScannerDo the following before you configure your tethered scanner from the In-termec Settings control panel applet. Information about the settings youcan configure with this applet is described in the Intermec Computer Com-mand Reference Manual. The online manual is available from the Intermecweb site at www.intermec.com.1Connect your tethered scanner to the tethered scanner port.2From the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings >theSystem tab >the Intermec Settings icon.3Tap the Scanners, Symbologies option, then tap (+) to expand DockTethered Scanner.

Scanner SupportChapter —6210 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual4Tap Scanner model for a drop-down list, then select the applicablescanner, such as “1551E” or “1553” in this sample screen.5Make sure a scanner is connected to your 700 Computer properly.Then, tap to check Enable scanner port,thentapFile >Save Settingsfrom the bottom of the screen. These changes take several moments toreset.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter211700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual1551E or 1553 Selected for Scanner ModelWhen “1551E” or “1553” is selected from the Scanner model option (seestep 4 above), and the port state is already enabled (see step 5),theprocesswill take several moments to reset. When 1551E or 1553 is successfullyconnected during this step, the unit will emit some beeps. Here, the termi-nal is initializing the scanner at 9600 for the baud rate, 7 data bits, evenparity, and 2 stop bits and synchronizing the terminal’s configuration withthe attached scanner.With “1551E” or “1553” selected, Symbologies, Symbology Options,Hardware Trigger, and Scanner Port settings are configured from the In-termec Settings applet. See the the Intermec Computer Command ReferenceManual, available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com, formore information about each enabled option.ASCII Selected for Scanner ModelTo send data coming into the 700 Color Computer through the COM1port from an external input device, as keyboard data to an application onthe desktop, do the following:1Select “ASCII” from the Scanner model option.2Tap to check Enable scanner port.3Tap File >Save Settings from the bottom of the screen.With “ASCII” selected, Symbology Options, Hardware Trigger, and Scan-ner Port settings are configured from the Intermec Settings applet. See thethe Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual,availablefromtheIn-termec web site at www.intermec.com, for more information about eachenabled option.

Scanner SupportChapter —6212 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNote: When selecting either the 1551E or the 1553 Scanner or enablingthe scanner port for these scanners, the 700 Computer tries to communi-cate with the attached scanner. If the scanner is not powered, if the cable isnot connected properly, the wrong cable is used, or if the scanner firmwareis older than 2.0, and the “Failed to save one or more settings” messageappears, then this step failed.This process can take time as the terminal is going through a group ofRS-232 settings to communicate with the scanner. After successful com-municated with the scanner (about eight beeps are generated), it initializesthe scanner with the 700 Computer’s current settings. This process mightgenerate a series of beeps pending on the firmware version installed in thescanner. These beeps are suppressed in firmware versions 2.08 or greater.Troubleshooting the 1551E/1553 Tethered ScannerDo the following to troubleshoot your 1551/1553 Tethered Scanner:1Ensure the correct cable is used for the scanner on the tethered scannerport. Note the 700 Computer cannot supply power to the scanner.2Perform a quick test to determine whether the connection is good.Temporary select the scanner model as “ASCII,” then enable the scan-ner port state. Go to a command prompt or a notepad and scan a datalabel. If a label is wedged into the command prompt or notepad, thenthe connection is good.3If step 2 passes, reset the scanner configurations to their defaults (scanthe Reset Factory Defaults label on the next page) to prevent miscom-munication, then reenable the scanner port state.4If step 2 fails, then the firmware installed in the tethered scanner may beolder than version 2.0. Upgrade your scanner firmware.Reset Factory DefaultsScan the EasySet software bar code label “Reset Factory Default” to restoreall of your scanner’s configurations to their factory defaults. When thiscommand label is scanned, reinitialize the tethered scanner (such as disablethe scanner port state, then enable it) on the 700 Computer. Otherwise,the online configuration and scanning on the 700 Computer are not func-tional. In general, scan this label only to initially reset the scanner.Do not scan EasySet command labels to change the following settings:SSymbologies code mark SCode 128, EAN29 IdentifierSPreamble and Postamble SEnable/Disable symbologiesSSymbology ID transmit optionIn some cases, scanning EasySet Command labels cause the current settingon the user interface to be out of sync with the scanner settings. However,in some cases, scanning these labels does corrupt scanned data.The “Open COMx error: 0x00000037” message appears if the COM portcannot open due to another application using the port. Disable that ap-plication to free up the COM1 port before you can enable the scanner. “x”istheCOMportnumber,suchas1,2,or3.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter213700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTethered Scanner Supported SymbologiesThe user interface may allow configuration of PDF417, Micro PDF417,RSS, and Codablock bar code symbologies. However, these symbologiesare dependant on what scanner models and firmware versions are in use.See the following table for a guideline and Appendix B, “Bar Code Symbol-ogies” for more information on each supported symbology:You can use a generic ASCII scanner with the 700 Color Computer.Pending on the scanner, linear symbologies such as Code39, should de-code correctly. However, 2D symbologies such as PDF417 may not de-code correctly.Symbologies 1551E 1553Code39 XXUPC/EAN X XCode 128 XXInterleaved 2 of 5 X XCode 93 XXCodabar X XCode 2 of 5 XXMSI X XPlessey XXCode 11 X XMatrix 2 of 5 XXTelepen X XPDF417 Available in 1551 0808 PDFMicro PDF417 Available in 1551 0808 PDF, Sxxp217_ or laterMaxiCodeData MatrixQR CodeRSS 14 F/w version 2.15 or later F/w version 2.15 or laterRSS Limited F/w version 2.15 or later F/w version 2.15 or laterRSS Expanded F/w version 2.15 or later F/w version 2.15 or laterCodablock A Available in 1551 0808 PDFCodablock F Available in 1551 0808 PDFUCC Composite

Scanner SupportChapter —6214 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

215700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualProgramming7The following programming information pertains to the 700 Series ColorMobile Computer:SCreating CAB Files (page 216)SCustomization and Lockdown (page 233)SFTP Server (page 234)SKernel I/O Control Functions (page 242)SNetwork Selection APIs (page 258)SNotifications (page 281)SReboot Functions (page 283)SRemapping the Keypad (page 284)Note: “700 Color” pertains to 740, 741, 750, 751, 760, and 761 Com-puters unless otherwise noted.

ProgrammingChapter —7216 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCreating CAB FilesThe Windows CE operating system uses a .CAB file to install an applica-tion on a Windows CE-based device. A .CAB file is composed of multiplefiles that are compressed into one file. Compressing multiple files into onefile provides the following benefits:SAll application files are present.SA partial installation is prevented.SThe application can be installed from several sources, such as a desktopcomputer or a Web site.Use the CAB Wizard application (CABWIZ.EXE) to generate a .CAB fileforyourapplication.Creating Device-Specific CAB FilesDo the following to create a device-specific .CAB file for an application, inthe order provided:1Create an .INF file with Windows CE-specific modifications (page216).2Optional Create a SETUP.DLL file to provide custom control of theinstallation process (page 228).3UsetheCABWizardtocreatethe.CABfile,usingthe.INFfile,theoptional SETUP.DLL file, and the device-specific application files asparameters (page 231).Creating an .INF FileAn .INF file specifies information about an application for the CAB Wi-zard. Below are the sections of an .INF file:[Version]This specifies the creator of the file, version, and other relevant informa-tion.Required? YesSSignature:“signature_name”“$Windows NT$”SProvider:“INF_creator”The company name of the application, such as “Microsoft.”SCESignature“$Windows CE$”Example[Version]Signature = “$Windows NT$”Provider = “Intermec”CESignature = “$Windows CE$”

$Programming—Chapter 7217700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual[CEStrings]This specifies string substitutions for the application name and the defaultinstallation directory.Required? YesSAppName:app_nameName of the application. Other instances of %AppName% in the .INFfile are replaced with this string value, such as RP32.SInstallDir:default_install_dirDefault installation directory on the device. Other instances of %Install-Dir% in the .INF file are replaced with this string value. Example:\SDMMC_Disk\%AppName%Example[CEStrings]AppName=“Game Pack”InstallDir=%CE1%\%AppName%[Strings]This section is optional and defines one or more string keys. A string keyrepresents a string of printable characters.Required? NoSstring_key:valueString consisting of letters, digits, or other printable characters. Enclosevalue in double quotation marks ““”” if the corresponding string key isused in an item that requires double quotation marks. No string_keys isokay.Example[Strings]reg_path = Software\Intermec\My Test App$

ProgrammingChapter —7218 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual[CEDevice]Describes the platform for the targeted application. All keys in this sectionare optional. If a key is nonexistent or has no data, Windows CE does notperform any checking with the exception being UnsupportedPlatforms.Ifthe UnsupportedPlatforms key exists but no data, the previous value is notoverridden.Required? YesSProcessorType :processor_typeThe value that is returned by SYSTEMINFO.dwProcessorType.Forexample, the value for the ARM CPU is 2577SUnsupportedPlatforms:platform_family_nameThis lists known unsupported platform family names. If the namespecified in the [CEDevice.xxx] section is different from that in the[CEDevice] section, both platform_family_name values are unsupportedfor the microprocessor specified by xxx. That is, the list of unsupportedplatform family names is appended to the previous list of unsupportednames. Application Manager will not display the application for anunsupported platform. Also, a user will be warned during the setupprocess if the .CAB file is copied to an unsupported device.Example[CEDevice]UnsupportedPlatforms = pltfrm1 ; pltfrm1 is unsupported[CEDevice.SH3]UnsupportedPlatforms = ; pltfrm1 is still unsupportedSVersionMin:minor_versionNumeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMinor. The.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version ofthis device is greater than or equal to VersionMin.SVersionMax:major_versionNumeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMajor. The.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version ofthis device is less than or equal to VersionMax.SBuildMin:build_numberNumeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwBuildNumber. The.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version ofthis device is greater than or equal to BuildMin.SBuildMax:build_numberNumeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwBuildNumber. The.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version ofthis device is less than or equal to BuildMax.

Programming—Chapter 7219700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualExampleThe following code example shows three [CEDevice] sections: one thatgives basic information for any CPU and two that are specific to the SH3and the MIPS microprocessors.[CEDevice] ; A “template” for all platformsUnsupportedPlatforms = pltfrm1 ; Does not support pltfrm1; The following specifies version 1.0 devices only.VersionMin = 1.0VersionMax = 1.0[CEDevice.ARM] ; Inherits all [CEDevice] settings; This will create a .CAB file specific to ARM devices.ProcessorType = 2577 ; ARM .cab file is valid for ARM microprocessors.UnsupportedPlatforms = ; pltfrm1 is still unsupported; The following overrides the version settings so that no version checking isperformed.VersionMin =VersionMax =[CEDevice.MIPS] ; Inherits all [CEDevice] settings; This will create a .CAB file specific to “MIPS” devices.ProcessorType = 4000 ; MIPS .CAB file is valid for MIPSmicroprocessor.UnsupportedPlatforms =pltfrm2 ; pltfrm1,pltfrm2 unsupported for MIPs .CABfile.Note:TocreatethetwoCPU-specific.CABfilesfortheSETUP.INFfilein the previous example, run the CAB Wizard with the “/cpu arm mips”parameter.

$ProgrammingChapter —7220 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual[DefaultInstall]This describes the default installation of your application. Note that underthis section, you will list items expanded upon later in this description.Required? YesSCopyfiles:copyfile_list_sectionMaps to files defined later in the .INF file, such as Files.App, Files.Font,and Files.Bitmaps.SAddReg:add_registry_sectionExample: RegSettings.AllSCEShortcuts:shortcut_list_sectionString that identifies one more section that defines shortcuts to a file, asdefined in the [CEShortcuts] section.SCESetupDLL:setup_DLLOptimal string that specifies a SETUP.DLL file. It is written by the In-dependent Software Vendor (ISV) and contains customized functionsfor operations during installation and removal of the application. Thefile must be specified in the [SourceDisksFiles] section.SCESelfRegister:self_reg_DLL_filenameString that identifies files that self-register by exporting the DllRegister-Server and DllUnregisterServer Component Object Model (COM)functions. Specify these files in the [SourceDiskFiles] section. Duringinstallation, if installation on the device fails to call the file’s exportedDllRegisterServer function, the file’s exported DllUnregisterServerfunction will not be called during removal.Example[DefaultInstall]AddReg = RegSettings.AllCEShortcuts = Shortcuts.All[SourceDiskNames]This section describes the name and path of the disk on which your ap-plication resides.Required? YesSdisk_ordinal:disk_label,,path1=,“App files” , C:\Appsoft\RP32\...2=,“Font files”,,C:\RpTools\...3=,“CE Tools” ,,C:\windows ce tools...SCESignature: “$Windows CE$”Example[SourceDisksNames] ; Required section1 = ,“Common files”,,C:\app\common ; Using an absolute path[SourceDisksNames.SH3]2 = ,“SH3 files”,,sh3 ; Using a relative path[SourceDisksNames.MIPS]2 = ,“MIPS files”,,mips ; Using a relative path$

$Programming—Chapter 7221700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual[SourceDiskFiles]This describes the name and path of the files in which your applicationresides.Required? YesSfilename:disk_number[,subdir]RPM.EXE = 1,c:\appsoft\...WCESTART.INI = 1RPMCE212.INI = 1TAHOMA.TTF = 2Note:[,subdir] is relative to the location of the INF file.Example[SourceDisksFiles] ; Required sectionbegin.wav = 1end.wav = 1sample.hlp = 1[SourceDisksFiles.SH3]sample.exe = 2 ; Uses the SourceDisksNames.SH3 identification of 2.[SourceDisksFiles.MIPS]sample.exe = 2 ; Uses the SourceDisksNames.MIPS identification of 2.$

$ProgrammingChapter —7222 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual[DestinationDirs]This describes the names and paths of the destination directories for theapplication on the target device. Note Windows CE does not support directo-ry identifiers.Required? YesSfile_list_section:0,subdirString that identifies the destination directory. The following list showsthe string substitutions supported by Windows CE. Use these only forthe beginning of the path. \%CE1% \Program Files%CE2% \Windows%CE3% \My Documents%CE4% \Windows\Startup%CE5% \My Documents%CE6% \Program Files\Accessories%CE7% \Program Files\Communication%CE8% \Program Files\Games%CE9% \Program Files\Pocket Outlook%CE10% \Program Files\Office%CE11% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs%CE12% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Accessories%CE13% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Communications%CE14% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Games%CE15% \Windows\Fonts%CE16% \Windows\Recent%CE17% \Windows\Start Menu%InstallDir%Contains the path to the target directory selected during installation. Itis declared in the [CEStrings] section%AppName%Contains the application name defined in the [CEStrings] section.Example[DestinationDirs]Files.Common = 0,%CE1%\My Subdir ; \Program Files\My SubdirFiles.Shared = 0,%CE2% ; \Windows$

Programming—Chapter 7223700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual[CopyFiles]This section, under the [DefaultInstall] section, describes the default filesto copy to the target device. Within the [DefaultInstall] section, files werelisted that must be defined elsewhere in the INF file. This section identi-fies that mapping and may contain flags.Required? YesScopyfile_list_section:destination_filename,[source_filename]The source_filename parameter is optional if it is the same as destina-tion_filename.Scopyfile_list_section:flagsThenumericvaluethatspecifiesanactiontobedonewhilecopyingfi-les. The following table shows values supported by Windows CE.Flag Value DescriptionCOPYFLG_WARN_IF_SKIP 0x00000001 Warn user if skipping a file is attempted after error.COPYFLG_NOSKIP 0x00000002 Do not allow a user to skip copying a file.COPYFLG_NO_OVERWRITE 0x00000010 Do not overwrite files in destination directory.COPYFLG_REPLACEONLY 0x00000400 Copy the source file to the destination directory only if thefile is already in the destination directory.CE_COPYFLG_NO_DATE_DIALOG 0x20000000 Do not copy files if the target file is newer.CE_COPYFLG_NODATECHECK 0x40000000 Ignore date while overwriting the target file.CE_COPYFLG_SHARED 0x80000000 Create a reference when a shared DLL is counted.Example[DefaultInstall.SH3]CopyFiles = Files.Common, Files.SH3[DefaultInstall.MIPS]CopyFiles = Files.Common, Files.MIPS

$ProgrammingChapter —7224 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual[AddReg]This section, under the [DefaultInstall] section, is optional and describesthe keys and values that the .CAB file adds to the device registry. Withinthe [DefaultInstall] section, a reference may have been made to thissection, such as “AddReg=RegSettings.All”. This section defines theoptions for that setting.Required? NoSadd_registry_section:registry_root_stringString that specifies the registry root location. The following list showsthevaluessupportedbyWindowsCE.SHKCR Same as HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTSHKCU Same as HKEY_CURRENT_USERSHKLM Same as HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESadd_registry_section:value_nameRegistryvaluename.Ifempty,the“default”registryvaluenameisused.Sadd_registry_section:flagsNumeric value that specifies information about the registry key. Thefollowing table shows the values that are supported by Window CE.Flag Value DescriptionFLG_ADDREG_NOCLOBBER 0x00000002 If the registry key exists, do not overwrite it. Can be usedwith any of the other flags in this table.FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_SZ 0x00000000 REG_SZ registry data type.FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_MULTI_SZ 0x00010000 REG_MULTI_SZ registry data type. Value field that followscan be a list of strings separated by commas.FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_BINARY 0x00000001 REG_BINARY registry data type. Value field that followsmust be a list of numeric values separated by commas, onebyte per field, and must not use the 0x hexadecimal prefix.FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_DWORD 0x00010001 REG_DWORD data type. The noncompatible format in theWin32 Setup .INF documentation is supported.ExampleAddReg = RegSettings.All[RegSettings.All]HKLM,%reg_path%,,0x00000000,alpha ; <default> = “alpha”HKLM,%reg_path%,test,0x00010001,3 ; Test = 3HKLM,%reg_path%\new,another,0x00010001,6 ; New\another = 6$

$Programming—Chapter 7225700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual[CEShortCuts]This section, a Windows CE-specific section under the [DefaultInstall]section, is optional and describes the shortcuts that the installation applica-tion creates on the device. Within the [DefaultInstall] section, a referencemay have been made to this section, such as “ShortCuts.All”. This sectiondefines the options for that setting.Required? NoSshortcut_list_section:shortcut_filenameString that identifies the shortcut name. It does not require the .LNKextension.Sshortcut_list_section:shortcut_type_flagNumeric value. Zero or empty represents a shortcut to a file; any non-zero numeric value represents a shortcut to a folder.Sshortcut_list_section:target_file_pathString value that specifies the destination location. Use the target filename for a file, such as MyApp.exe, that must be defined in a file copylist. For a path, use a file_list_section name defined in the [Destination-Dirs] section, such as DefaultDestDir,orthe%InstallDir% string.Sshortcut_list_section:standard_destination_pathOptional string value. A standard %CEx% path or %InstallDir%.Ifnovalue is specified, the shortcut_list_section name of the current section orthe DefaultDestDir value from the [DestinationDirs] section is used.ExampleCEShortcuts = Shortcuts.All[Shortcuts.All]Sample App,0,sample.exe ; Uses the path in DestinationDirs. SampleApp,0,sample.exe,%InstallDir% ; The path is explicitly specified.Sample .INF File[Version] ; Required sectionSignature = “$Windows NT$”Provider = “Intermec Technologies Corporation”CESignature = “$Windows CE$”;[CEDevice];ProcessorType =[DefaultInstall] ; Required sectionCopyFiles = Files.App, Files.Fonts, Files.BitMaps, Files.Intl,Files.TelecomNcsCE, Files.Windows, Files.Import, Files.Export, Files.Work,Files.Database, Files.WinCE AddReg = RegSettings.All ;CEShortcuts =Shortcuts.All[SourceDisksNames] ; Required section1 = ,“App files” ,,c:\appsoft\...2 = ,”Font files” ,,c:\WinNT\Fonts3 = ,”CE Tools” ,,c:\windows ce tools\wce400\700ie\mfc\lib\x86[SourceDisksFiles] ; Required sectionrpm.exe = 1,C:\Appsoft\program\wce400\WCEX86Rel700wcestart.ini = 1$

$ProgrammingChapter —7226 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manualrpmce212.ini = 1intermec.bmp = 1rpmlogo.bmp = 1rpmname.bmp = 1import.bmp = 1export.bmp = 1clock.bmp = 1printer.bmp = 1filecopy.bmp = 1readme.txt = 1lang_eng.bin = 1rpmdata.dbd = 1,database\wce1tahoma.ttf = 2mfcce212.dll = 3olece212.dll = 3olece211.dll = 1,c:\windows ce tools\wce400\NMSD61102.11\mfc\lib\x86rdm45wce.dll = 1,c:\rptools\rdm45wce\4_50\lib\wce400\wcex86relpicfmt.dll = 1,c:\rptools\picfmt\1_00\wce400\wcex86rel6110fmtctrl.dll = 1,c:\rptools\fmtctrl\1_00\wce400\wcex86rel6110ugrid.dll = 1,c:\rptools\ugrid\1_00\wce400\wcex86rel6110simple.dll = 1,c:\rptools\pspbm0c\1_00\wce400\wcex86relpsink.dll = 1,c:\rptools\psink\1_00\wce400\WCEX86RelMinDependencypslpwce.dll =1,c:\rptools\pslpm0c\1_00\wce400\WCEX86RelMinDependencynpcpport.dll = 1,c:\rptools\cedk\212_03\installable drivers\printer\npcp;dexcom.dll = 1,c:\rptools\psdxm0c\1_00\x86ncsce.exe = 1,c:\rptools\ncsce\1_04nrinet.dll = 1,c:\rptools\ncsce\1_04[DestinationDirs] ; Required section;Shortcuts.All = 0,%CE3% ; \Windows\DesktopFiles.App = 0,%InstallDir%Files.DataBase = 0,%InstallDir%\DataBaseFiles.BitMaps = 0,%InstallDir%\BitmapsFiles.Fonts = 0,%InstallDir%\FontsFiles.Intl = 0,%InstallDir%\IntlFiles.TelecomNcsCE = 0,%InstallDir%\Telecom\NcsCEFiles.Windows = 0,%InstallDir%\WindowsFiles.Import = 0,%InstallDir%\ImportFiles.Export = 0,%InstallDir%\ExportFiles.Work = 0,%InstallDir%\WorkFiles.WinCE = 0,\storage_card\wince[CEStrings] ; Required sectionAppName = Rp32InstallDir = \storage_card\%AppName%[Strings] ; Optional section;[Shortcuts.All];Sample App,0,sample.exe ; Uses the path in DestinationDirs.;Sample App,0,sample.exe,%InstallDir% ; The path is explicitly specified.[Files.App]rpm.exe,,,0rpm.ini,rpmce212.ini,,0mfcce212.dll,,,0olece212.dll,,,0olece211.dll,,,0rdm45wce.dll,,,0picfmt.dll,,,0$

$Programming—Chapter 7227700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manualfmtctrl.dll,,,0ugrid.dll,,,0simple.dll,,,0psink.dll,,,0pslpwce.dll,,,0npcpport.dll,,,0;dexcom.dll,,,0[Files.DataBase]rpmdata.dbd,,,0[Files.Fonts]tahoma.ttf,,,0[Files.BitMaps]intermec.bmp,,,0rpmlogo.bmp,,,0rpmname.bmp,,,0import.bmp,,,0export.bmp,,,0clock.bmp,,,0printer.bmp,,,0filecopy.bmp,,,0[Files.Intl]lang_eng.bin,,,0[Files.TelecomNcsCE]ncsce.exe,,,0nrinet.dll,,,0[Files.Windows]readme.txt,,,0[Files.Import]readme.txt,,,0[Files.Export]readme.txt,,,0[Files.Work]readme.txt,,,0[Files.WinCE]wcestart.ini,,,0[RegSettings.All]HKLM,”SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Shell\AutoHide”,,0x00010001,1; Autohide the taskbar HKLM,”SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Shell\OnTop”,,0x00010001,0; Shell is not on topHKLM,”SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Clock”,SHOW_CLOCK,0x00010001,0; Clock is not on taskbar$

$ProgrammingChapter —7228 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUsing Installation Functions in SETUP.DLLSETUP.DLL is an optional file that enables you to perform custom opera-tions during installation and removal of your application. The followinglist shows the functions that are exported by SETUP.DLL.Install_Init Called before installation begins. Use this function to check the application version when reinstal-ling an application and to determine if a dependent application is present.Install_Exit Called after installation is complete. Use this function to handle errors that occur during applica-tion installation.Uninstall_Init Called before the removal process begins. Use this function to close the application, if the applica-tion is running.Uninstall_Exit Called after the removal process is complete. Use this function to save database information to afile and delete the database and to tell the user where the user data files are stored and how to rein-stall the application.Note;Use[DefaultInstall] >CESelfRegister (page 220) in the .INF file topoint to SETUP.DLL.After the CAB File ExtractionCab files that need to cause a warm reset after cab extraction will need tocreate the __RESETMEPLEASE__.TXT file in the “\Windows” directory.The preferred method to create this file is within the DllMain portion oftheSETUP.DLLfile.Itlookslikethis:#include <windows.h>#include <Tlhelp32.h>#include <winioctl.h>#include <ce_setup.h> // in the public SDK dir#define IOCTL_TERMINAL_RESET CTL_CODE (FILE_DEVICE_UNKNOWN,FILE_ANY_ACCESS,2050, METHOD_NEITHER)BOOL APIENTRY DllMain( HANDLE h, DWORD reason, LPVOID lpReserved ){return TRUE;} // DllMain//************************************************************************// $DOCBEGIN$// BOOL IsProcessRunning( TCHAR * pname );//// Description: Get process table snapshot, look for pname running.//// Arguments: pname - pointer to name of program to look for.// for example, app.exe.//// Returns: TRUE - process is running.// FALSE - process is not running.// $DOCEND$//************************************************************************BOOL IsProcessRunning( TCHAR * pname ){HANDLE hProcList;$

$Programming—Chapter 7229700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPROCESSENTRY32 peProcess;DWORD thDeviceProcessID;TCHAR lpname[MAX_PATH];if ( !pname || !*pname ) return FALSE;_tcscpy( lpname, pname );_tcslwr( lpname );hProcList = CreateToolhelp32Snapshot( TH32CS_SNAPPROCESS, 0 );if ( hProcList == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE ) {return FALSE;} // end ifmemset( &peProcess, 0, sizeof(peProcess) );peProcess.dwSize = sizeof(peProcess);if ( !Process32First( hProcList, &peProcess ) ) {CloseToolhelp32Snapshot( hProcList );return FALSE;} // end ifthDeviceProcessID = 0;do {_tcslwr( peProcess.szExeFile );if ( _tcsstr( peProcess.szExeFile, lpname ) ) {thDeviceProcessID = peProcess.th32ProcessID;break;} // end if} while ( Process32Next( hProcList, &peProcess ) );if ( ( GetLastError() == ERROR_NO_MORE_FILES ) && ( thDeviceProcessID == 0)){CloseToolhelp32Snapshot( hProcList );return FALSE;} // end ifCloseToolhelp32Snapshot( hProcList );return TRUE;} // IsProcessRunningcodeINSTALL_INIT Install_Init(HWND hwndParent,BOOL fFirstCall,BOOL fPreviouslyInstalled,LPCTSTR pszInstallDir ){return codeINSTALL_INIT_CONTINUE;}codeINSTALL_EXIT Install_Exit (HWND hwndParent,LPCTSTR pszInstallDir,WORD cFailedDirs,WORD cFailedFiles,WORD cFailedRegKeys,$

$ProgrammingChapter —7230 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWORD cFailedRegVals,WORD cFailedShortcuts ){HANDLE h;TCHAR srcfile[MAX_PATH];TCHAR dstfile[MAX_PATH];if (cFailedDirs || cFailedFiles || cFailedRegKeys ||cFailedRegVals || cFailedShortcuts)return codeINSTALL_EXIT_UNINSTALL;if ( IsProcessRunning( L”autocab.exe” ) ){h = CreateFile( L”\\Windows\\__resetmeplease__.txt”,(GENERIC_READ | GENERIC_WRITE), 0, NULL, CREATE_ALWAYS,FILE_ATTRIBUTE_HIDDEN, NULL );if ( h != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE )CloseHandle( h );else{// Couldn’t create the file. If it failed because the file alreadyexists, it is not fatal.// Otherwise, notify user of the inability to reset the device and theywill have to// perform it manually after all of the installations are complete.} // end if}else{DWORD dret;h = CreateFile( L”SYI1:”,(GENERIC_WRITE | GENERIC_READ), 0, NULL, OPEN_EXISTING,FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL );// Force a warm start NOW.if ( h != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE ){DeviceIoControl( h, IOCTL_TERMINAL_RESET, NULL, 0, NULL, 0, &dret,NULL);// Won’t return, but we’ll show clean up anywayCloseHandle( h );}else{// Couldn’t access SYSIO. Notify user.} // end if} // end ifreturn codeINSTALL_EXIT_DONE;}codeUNINSTALL_INITUninstall_Init(HWND hwndParent,LPCTSTR pszInstallDir ) {$

$Programming—Chapter 7231700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual// TODO: Perform the reverse of INSTALL_INIT herereturn codeUNINSTALL_INIT_CONTINUE;}codeUNINSTALL_EXITUninstall_Exit(HWND hwndParent) {// TODO: Perform the reverse of INSTALL_EXIT herereturn codeUNINSTALL_EXIT_DONE;}The system software looks for the following directory structure and files ontheinstalledmediacardwhetheritbeanSDcardorCFcardorembeddedflash file system. No other folders need exist.\2577\autorun.exe\2577\autorun.dat\2577\autocab.exe\2577\autocab.dat\cabfiles\*.cabCreating CAB Files with CAB WizardAfter you create the .INF file and the optional SETUP.DLL file, use theCAB Wizard to create the .CAB file. The command-line syntax for theCABWizardisasfollows:cabwiz.exe “inf_file” [/dest dest_directory] [/err error_file] [/cpu cpu_type[cpu_type]]A batch file, located in <program> directory, with the following com-mands, works well:cabwiz.exe c:\appsoft\<program>\<inf_file_name>cd \appsoft\<program>“inf_file” The SETUP.INF file path.dest_directory The destination directory for the .CAB files. If no directory is specified, the .CAB files are createdin the “inf_file” directory.error_file The file name for a log file that contains all warnings and errors that are encountered when the.CAB files are compiled. If no file name is specified, errors are displayed in message boxes. If a filename is used, the CAB Wizard runs without the user interface (UI); this is useful for automatedbuilds.cpu_type Creates a .CAB file for each specified microprocessor tag, which is a label used in the Win32 SE-TUP.INF file to differentiate between different microprocessor types. The /cpu parameter, fol-lowed by multiple cpu_type values, must be the last qualifier in the command line.ExampleThis example creates .CAB files for the ARM and MIPS microprocessors,assuming the Win32 SETUP.INF file contains the ARM and MIPS tags:cabwiz.exe “c:\myfile.inf” /err myfile.err /cpu arm mipsNote: CABWIZ.EXE, MAKECAB.EXE, and CABWIZ.DDF (WindowsCE files available on the Windows CE Toolkit) must be installed in thesame directory on the desktop computer. Call CABWIZ.EXE using its fullpath for the CAB Wizard application to run correctly.$

ProgrammingChapter —7232 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTroubleshooting the CAB WizardTo identify and avoid problems that might occur when using the CABWizard, follow these guidelines:SUse %% for a percent sign (%) character when using this character inan .INF file string, as specified in Win32 documentation. This will notwork under the [Strings] section.SDo not use .INF or .CAB files created for Windows CE to install ap-plications on Windows-based desktop platforms.SEnsure the MAKECAB.EXE and CABWIZ.DDF files, included withWindows CE, are in the same directory as CABWIZ.EXE.SUse the full path to call CABWIZ.EXE.SDo not create a .CAB file with the MAKECAB.EXE file included withWindows CE. You must use CABWIZ.EXE, which usesMAKECAB.EXE to generate the .CAB files for Windows CE.SDo not set the read-only attribute for .CAB files.

ProgrammingChapter —7234 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualFTP ServerFTP support is provided through the FTP Server applicationFTPDCE.EXE (MS Windows CE Versions) which is provided as part thebase system.FTPDCE is the Internet File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server process. Theserver can be invoked from an application or command line. Besides ser-vicing FTP client requests the FTP Server also send a “network announce-ment” to notify prospective clients of server availability.Note: You should consult the RFC959 specification for proper use ofsome of these commands at the following URL:Shttp://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc959.txt for the text version, orShttp://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc959/ for an html versionDo the following to send commands:1Start an FTP client and connect to the device FTP server.2Log in with “intermec” as the user name and “cr52401” for the pass-word.3From the FTP client, send the command.4Wait for a response.Synopsisftpdce [options ]Options–Aaddr (where addr is in the form of a.b.c.d) Sets the single target address to which to send the network an-nouncement. Default is broadcast.–Bbyte Sets the FTP data block size. Smaller sizes may be useful over slower links. Default is 65536.–Cname Sets the device name. Used by Intermec management software.–Fvalue Disables the default Intermec account. A value of “0” disables the account. Default is “1”.Note that disabling the default account without providing a working access control list on the serverwill result in a device that will not accept any FTP connections.–Hsec Sets the interval between network announcements in seconds.A value of “0” turns the network an-nouncement off. Default is 30 seconds.–Iaddr (where addr is in the form of a.b.c.d) Sets the preferred 6920 Communications Server (optional).–Llog (where log is either “0” or “1”) Sets the state of logging. Default is 0 (disabled).–Nsec Specifies the number of seconds to wait before initially starting FTP server services.–Pport Sets the UDP port on which the network announcement will be sent. Default port is 52401.–Qport Sets the port on which the FTP Server will listen for connections. Defaultportis21.–Rdir Sets the FTP mount point to this directory. Default is the root folder of the object store.–Tscrip Sets the script name for the 6920 Communications Server to process.–Uurl Sets the default URL for this device.–Z“parms” Sets extended parameters to be included in the network announcement.

$Programming—Chapter 7235700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualConfigurable Parameters Via the Registry EditorThe following parameters receive default values during the installation ofthe Intermec FTP Server components. A few of the parameters are visiblein the registry by default, but most must be created in order to modify thedefault behavior of the FTP server.BlockSizeSetting this parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to transmit andreceive Ethernet packets using the specified data block size. By default, theFTP server transmits and receives data using a 64K data block size. Adjust-ing this value may be useful in certain wireless TCP/IP installations.Key HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTPValue Type REG_DWORD - data block size, in bytes.Valid Range 0x100-0x10000 (256-65536 decimal).Default 65536DeviceNameThis parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to include the speci-fied device name in the Intermec Device Network Announcement(IDNA). Adjusting this value may be useful in assigning a symbolic nameto this device for asset tracking.Key HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTPValue Type REG_SZValid Range None.Default None.DeviceURLThis parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the speci-fied URL in the IDNA. This can be used by Intermec management soft-ware for asset management.Key HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTPValue Type REG_SZValid Range None.Default None.$

$ProgrammingChapter —7236 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIDNATargetThis parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the IDNAto a specific destination instead of a general UDP broadcast. This parame-ter is useful on networks that do not allow UDP broadcasts to be routedbetween subnets. The use of this parameter restricts the reception of theIDNA to the target destination only.Key HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTPValue Type REG_SZValid Range None.Default None.ManifestNameThis parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the speci-fied manifest name in the IDNA. This parameter is used by the Intermec6920 Communications Server for communication transactions. See the6920 Communications Server documentation for proper use of this pa-rameter.Key HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTPValue Type REG_SZValid Range None.Default iftp.iniPauseAtStartupThis parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to sleep for the speci-fied number of seconds before making the FTP service available on thedevice.Key HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTPValue Type REG_DWORD - stored in seconds.Valid Range None.Default 0RootThis parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to set the root of theFTP mount point to the specified value. Note that this must map to an ex-isting directory or you will not be able to log into the FTP Server.Key HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTPValue Type REG_SZValid Range None.Default \$

Programming—Chapter 7237700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTransferring Files Over TCP/IP NetworksThe File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server transfers files over TCP/IP net-works. The FTPDCE.EXE program is a version that does not display awindow, but can run in the background.FTPDCE is the Internet File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server process. Theserver can be invoked from an application or command line. Besides ser-vicing FTP client requests, the FTP Server also sends a “network an-nouncement” to notify prospective clients of server availability.RemarksThe FTP Server currently supports the following FTP requests:CDUP Changes to the parent directory of the current working directory.CWD Changes working directory.DELE Deletes a file.HELP Gives help information.LIST (This FTP request is the same as the ls -lgA command). Gives list files in a directory.MKD Makes a directory.MODE (AlwaysUsesBinary).Specifies data transfer mode.NLST (Not supported) Givesanamelistoffilesindirectory(thisFTPrequestisthesameasthels command).NOOP Does nothing.PASS Specifies a password.PWD Prints the current working directory.QUIT Terminates session.RETR Retrieves a file.RMD Removes a directory.RNFR Specifies rename-from file name.RNTO Specifies rename-to file name.STOR Stores a file.SYST Shows the operating system type of server system.TYPE (Binary transfers only.) Specifies the data transfer type with the Type parameter.USER Specifies user name.XCUP (Not Normally Used) Changes the parent directory of the current working directory.XCWD (Not Normally Used) Changes the current directory.XMKD (Not Normally Used) Creates a directory.XPWD (Not Normally Used) Prints the current working directory.XRMD (Not Normally Used) Removes a directory.

$ProgrammingChapter —7238 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSITE The following extended OEM commands are supported by the SITE request. For Microsoft FTP cli-ents, you can send site commands by preceding the command with “quote” such as “quote site status.”ATTRIB Gets or sets the attributes of a given file. (SITE ATTRIB)Usage QUOTE SITE ATTRIB [+R |-R][+A |-A ][+S |-S][+H |-H][[path]filename]+Sets an attribute.–Clears an attribute.RRead-only file attribute.AArchive file attribute.SSystem file attribute.HHidden file attribute.To retrieve the attributes of a file, only specify the file. The server response will be:200-AD SHRCEIX filenameIf the flag exists in its position shown above, it is set. Also, in addition to the valuesdefined above, there is also defined:CCompressed file attribute.EEncrypted file attribute.IINROM file attribute.XXIPfileattribute(executeinROM,notshadowedinRAM).BOOT Reboots the server OS. This will cause the system on which the server is executing toreboot. The FTP Server will shut down cleanly before reboot. All client connectionswill be terminated. Cold boot is default except for the PocketPC build in which thedefault is warm boot. (SITE BOOT)Usage: QUOTE SITE BOOT [WARM |COLD]COPY Copies a file from one location to another. (SITE COPY)Usage: QUOTE SITE COPY [source][destination]Example: QUOTE SITE COPY ‘\Storage Card\one.dat’ ‘\Stor-age Card\two.dat’EXIT Exits the FTP Server. This command will shut down the FTP Server thus termina-ting all client connections. (SITE EXIT)Usage: QUOTE SITE EXITHELP Gives site command help information. (SITE HELP)Usage: QUOTE SITE HELP [command]KILL Terminates a running program. (SITE KILL)Usage: QUOTE SITE KILL [program |pid]LOG Opens or closes the program log. (SITE LOG)Usage: QUOTE SITE LOG [open [filename]| close]PLIST Lists the running processes (SITE PLIST)Usage: QUOTE SITE PLISTRUN Starts a program running. If the program to run has spaces in path or filename,wrappingthenamewithsinglequotesisrequired.Usage: QUOTE SITE RUN [program]Example: QUOTE SITE RUN ‘\Storage Card\app.exe’$

Programming—Chapter 7239700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSTATUS Returns the current settings of the FTP Server. MAC, serial number, model, IP ad-dress, network announcement information as well as OS memory usage are returned.(SITE STATUS)Usage: QUOTE SITE STATUSTIMEOUT Toggles idle timeout between 120 to 1200 seconds (2 to 20 minutes). If this timerexpires with no activity between the client and the server, the client connection willbe disconnected. If the optional seconds argument is supplied, the server will set theconnection timeout to the number of seconds specified. Default is 120 seconds or 2minutes. (SITE TIMEOUT)Usage: QUOTE SITE TIMEOUT [seconds]EKEY Gives site command electronic key information. (SITE HELP)Usage: QUOTE SITE EKEY [command]EVAL Gives site command electronic value information. (SITE HELP)Usage: QUOTE SITE EVAL [command]GVAL Gives site command general value information. (SITE HELP)Usage: QUOTE SITE GVAL [command]PVAL Gives site command value information. (SITE HELP)Usage: QUOTE SITE PVAL [command]The remaining FTP requests specified in RFC 959 are recognized, but notimplemented.The banner returned in the parenthetical portion of its greeting shows theversion number of the FTP Server as well as the MAC address, serial num-ber and operating system of the machine hosting the server.The FTP Server supports browsing from the latest Netscape and Microsoftweb browsers. Drag-and-drop capability is available using this environ-ment.The FTPDCMDS subdirectory contains commands to use from the webbrowser.SClick EXITME.BIN to execute a SITE EXIT command.SClick REBOOTME.BIN to execute SITE BOOT command.SUse the GET command on these files to have the FTP Server executethese commands.SSecurity:A customer configurable access control list may be installed on the700 Color Computer. This list will allow customers to restrict accessvia the FTP Server to users they wish and is in addition to defaultIntermec accounts that are disabled using the -F0 option at runtime.The access control list is named FTPDCE.TXT and is placed in thesame directory on the 700 Color Computer as the FTPDCE.EXEserver. The FTP Server encrypts this file to keep the information safefrom unauthorized users. This file is encrypted when the FTP Serveris started so a file that is placed onto the 700 Color Computer afterthe FTP Server starts will require a restart of the FTP Server to takeeffect.

$Programming—Chapter 7241700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualThe default is to start the FTP Server at boot time, unless the followingregistry entry is defined and set to “0” which disables AutoFTP. “1” en-ablestheAutoFTP.TheentrycanbesetfromtheNDISTRAYpop-upmenu by selecting either AutoFTP On or AutoFTP Off.HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Intermec\Ndistray\StartupIFTPThese new entries are located below the selections to load the networkdrivers. If the StartupIFTP registry key is not defined, the FTP Server isloaded by default, to provide “out-of-the-box” capability for customerswho want to begin loading files to the 700 Color Computer without anyprior configuration.Note: If a network driver is unloaded using the NDISTRAY popup menu,and the FTP Server is running, the FTP Server is stopped.On a resume, if AutoFTP is enabled and the FTP Server is running, it isstopped and restarted. NDISTRAY uses a helper application named RESE-TIFTP to implement the restart on resume feature.To do an AutoFTP Installation Check:1Ensure the FTP Server is running “out-of-the-box” the first time.2Tap Start >Today to access the Today screen, then tap the antennaicon in the System Tray to bring up the NDISTRAY pop-up menu.Select AutoFTP Off to disable AutoFTP. Do a warm boot and confirmthe FTP Server is not running.3Tap Start >Today to access the Today screen, then tap the antennaicon in the System Tray to bring up the NDISTRAY pop-up menu.Select AutoFTP On to enable AutoFTP, reboot, confirm it is running.4Unload the network driver when the FTP Server is running and con-firm that it is not running any more.5Load the FTP Server, establish a connection, then suspend and resume.The server should still run, but the FTP connection to the client shouldbe dropped.$

$ProgrammingChapter —7242 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualKernel I/O ControlsThis describes the KernelIoControl() functions available to applicationprogrammers. Most C++ applications will need to prototype the functionas the following to avoid link and compile errors.extern “C” BOOL KernelIoControl(DWORD dwIoControlCode, LPVOID lpInBuf, DWORDnInBufSize, LPVOID lpOutBuf, DWORD nOutBufSize, LPDWORD lpBytesReturned);IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFOThis IOCTL returns either the platform type or the OEMPLATFORMnamebasedonaninputvalue.SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, LPVOIDlpInBuf, DWORD nInBufSize, LPVOID lpOutBuf, DWORDnOutBufSize, LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Points to a DWORD containing either the SPI_GETPLAT-FORMTYPE or SPI_GETOEMINFO value.lpInBufSize Must be set to sizeof(DWORD).lpOutBuf Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the return data of thefunction. If SPI_GETPLATFORMTYPE is specified in lpInBuf,then the “PocketPC\0” Unicode string is returned. If SPI_GE-TOEMINFO is specified in lpInBuf, then the “Intermec 700\0”Unicode string is returned.nOutBufSize ThesizeoflpOutBuf in bytes. Must be large enough to hold thestring returned.lpBytesReturned The actual number of bytes returned by the function for the datarequested.Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.$

$Programming—Chapter 7243700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARMUsage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Points to this structure. See “ID Field Values”below.struct PARMS {BYTE id;BYTE ClassId;};nInBufSize Must be set to the size of the PARMS structure.lpOutBuf Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the return data of thefunction. If this field is set to NULL and nOutBufSize is set to zerowhen the function is called the function will return the numberbytes required by the buffer.nOutBufSize ThesizeoflpOutBuf in bytes.lpBytesReturned Number of bytes returned by the function for the data requested.Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the error value. EitherERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER orERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER may be returned when this functionis used to get the error.ID Field ValuesThe id field of the PARMS structure may be one of the following values:ID Field ValuesITC_NVPARM_ETHERNET_IDThis IOCTL returns the Ethernet 802.11b or 802.11b/g MAC Address. Six bytes are returned in the buffer pointedto by the lpOutBuffer parameter.ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL_NUMThis IOCTL returns the serial number of the device in BCD format. Six bytes are returned in the buffer pointed toby the lpOutBuffer parameter.ITC_NVPARM_MANF_DATEThis IOCTL returns the device date of manufacture in the BCD YYYY/MM/DD format. Four bytes are returned inthe buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.ITC_NVPARM_SERVICE_DATEThis IOCTL returns the device’s date of last service in BCD YYYY/MM/DD format. Four bytes are returned in thebuffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.$

ProgrammingChapter —7244 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualID Field Values (continued)ITC_NVPARM_DISPLAY_TYPEThis IOCTL returns the device’s display type. One byte is returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBufferparameter.ITC_NVPARM_EDG_IPThis IOCTL returns the device Ethernet debug IP address. Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by thelpOutBuffer parameter.ITC_NVPARM_EDBG_SUBNETThis IOCTL returns the device Ethernet debug subnet mask. Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by thelpOutBuffer parameter.ITC_NVPARM_ECNThis IOCTL returns ECNs applied to the device in a bit array format. Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointedto by the lpOutBuffer parameter.ITC_NVPARM_CONTRASTThis IOCTL returns the device default contrast setting. Two bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by thelpOutBuffer parameter.ITC_NVPARM_MCODEThis IOCTL returns the manufacturing configuration code for the device. Sixteen bytes arereturned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.ITC_NVPARM_VERSION_NUMBERThis IOCTL returns the firmware version for various system components. These values for the ClassId field of thePARMS structure are allowed when ITC_NVPARM_VERSION_NUMBER is used in the id field:SVN_CLASS_KBD Returns a five-byte string, including null terminator, that contains an ASCII value whichrepresents the keypad microprocessor version in the system. The format of the string is x.xx with a terminating nullcharacter.SVN_CLASS_ASIC Returns a five-byte string, including null terminator, that contains an ASCII value whichrepresents the version of the FPGA firmware in the system. The format of the string is x.xx with a terminating nullcharacter.SVN_CLASS_BOOTSTRAP Returns a five-byte string, including null terminator, that contains an ASCII valuewhich represents the version of the Bootstrap Loader firmware in the system. The format of the string is x.xx with aterminating null character.ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_SOFTWARE_CONTENTThis IOCTL reads the manufacturing flag bits from the non-volatile data store that dictates certain softwareparameters. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer that indicates if IntermecContentisenabledintheXIPregions.TRUEindicatesthatitisenabled.FALSEindicatesthatitisnotenabled.ITC_NVPARM_ANTENNA_DIVERSITYThis IOCTL reads the state of the antenna diversity flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointedto by lpOutBuffer that indicates if there is a diversity antenna installed. TRUE indicates that it is installed. FALSEindicatesthatitisnotinstalled.ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RIThis IOCTL reads the state of the WAN ring indicator flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the bufferpointed to by lpOutBuffer that indicates the polarity of the WAN RI signal. TRUE indicates active high. FALSEindicates active low.

Programming—Chapter 7245700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualID Field Values (continued)ITC_NVPARM_RTC_RESTOREThis IOCTL reads the state of the real-time clock restore flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the bufferpointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the RTC is restored upon a cold boot. FALSE indicates that theRTC is not restored.ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLECTION_SWThis IOCTL reads the state of the data collection software enabled flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in thebuffer pointer to by lpOutBuffer that indicates the data collection software is to install at boot time. FALSE indicatesthe data collection software should not install.ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLECTION_HWThis IOCTL reads the data collection hardware flags. A BYTE is returned in the buffer pointer to by lpOutBufferthat indicates the type of data collection hardware installed. The maximum possible value returned isITC_DEVID_SCANHW_MAX.SITC_DEVID_SCANHW_NONE No scanner hardware is installed.SITC_DEVID_OEM2D_IMAGER OEM 2D imager is installed.SITC_DEVID_INTERMEC2D_IMAGER Intermec 2D imager is installed.SITC_DEVID_SE900_LASER SE900 laser is installed.SITC_DEVID_SE900HS_LASER SE900HS laser is installed.SITC_DEVID_INTERMEC_EVIO EVIO linear imager is installed.The high bit indicates whether the S6 scanning engine is installed. The bit mask for this isITC_DEVID_S6ENGINE_MASK. A non-zero value indicates that the S6 scanning engine is installed.ITC_NVPARM_WAN_INSTALLEDThis IOCTL reads the state of the WAN radio installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the bufferpointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the WAN radio is installed. FALSE indicates that no WAN radio isinstalled.ITC_NVPARM_WAN_FREQUENCYThis IOCTL reads the state of the WAN radio frequency flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the bufferpointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the WAN radio frequency is United States. FALSE indicates thatthe WAN radio frequency is European.ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RADIOTYPEThis IOCTL reads the WAN radio ID installed by manufacturing. A BYTE is returned in the buffer pointer to bylpOutBuffer whichindicatesthetypeofWANradiohardwareinstalled.ThemaximumpossiblevaluereturnedisITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_MAX. The current definitions are:SITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_NONE No WAN radio installed.SITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIERRA_SB555 CDMA Sierra Wireless radio.SITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_XIRCOM_GEM3503 GSM/GPRS Intel (Xircom) radio.SITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIEMENS_MC45 GSM/GPRS Siemens radio.SITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIEMENS_MC46 GSM/GPRS Siemens radio.ITC_NVPARM_80211_INSTALLEDThis IOCTL reads the state of the 802.11b or 802.11b/g radio installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned inthe buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the 802.11b or 802.11b/g radio is installed. FALSEindicates that no 802.11b or 802.11b/g radio is installed.ITC_NVPARM_80211_RADIOTYPEThis IOCTL reads the 802.11b or 802.11b/g radio ID installed by manufacturing. A BYTE is returned in the bufferpointer to by lpOutBuffer that indicates the type of 802.11b or 802.11b/g radio hardware installed. The maximumpossible value returned is ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_MAX. The current definitions are:SITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_NONE No 802.11b or 802.11b/g radio installed.SITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_INTEL_2011B Intel 2011B radio installed.

ProgrammingChapter —7246 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualID Field Values (continued)ITC_NVPARM_BLUETOOTH_INSTALLEDThis IOCTL reads the state of the Bluetooth radio installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the bufferpointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the Bluetooth radio is installed. FALSE indicates that no Bluetoothradio is installed.ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL2_INSTALLEDThis IOCTL reads the state of the serial 2 (COM2) device installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in thebuffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the serial 2 device is installed. FALSE indicates that no serial2 device is installed.ITC_NVPARM_VIBRATE_INSTALLEDThis IOCTL reads the state of the vibrate device installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the bufferpointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the vibrate device is installed. FALSE indicates that no vibratedevice is installed.ITC_NVPARM_LAN9000_INSTALLEDThis IOCTL reads the state of the Ethernet device installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the bufferpointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the Ethernet device is installed. FALSE indicates that no Ethernetdevice is installed.ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_HW_INSTALLEDThis IOCTL reads the state of the SIM card protection hardware installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returnedin the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the SIM card protection hardware is installed. FALSEindicates that no SIM card protection hardware is installed.ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_SW_INSTALLEDThis IOCTL reads the state of the SIM card protection software installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returnedin the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the SIM card protection software is installed. FALSEindicates that no SIM card protection software is installed.ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_SW_INSTALLEDThis IOCTL reads the state of the SIM card protection software installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returnedin the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the SIM card protection software is installed. FALSEindicates that no SIM card protection software is installed.

Programming—Chapter 7247700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARMDescribes and enables the registry save location.Usage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize, LPVOID lpOutBuf, DWORDnOutBufSize, LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Asinglebytethatmaybeoneoftheid values. See “ID Field Values”on the next page.nInBufSize Must be set to the size of the lpInBuf in bytes.lpOutBuf Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the data to be writtento the non-volatile data store.nOutBufSize ThesizeoflpOutBuf in bytes.lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function.Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the error value. EitherERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER orERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER may be returned when this functionis used to get the error.

$ProgrammingChapter —7248 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualID Field ValuesThe id field of lpInBuf may be one of the following values:ID Field ValuesITC_REGISTRY_SAVE_ENABLEThis function enables or disables the save registry to non-volatile media feature of the RegFlushKey() function.lpOutBuf mustbesettozero(FALSE)ifthefeatureistobedisabledorone(TRUE)ifthefeatureistobeenabled.ITC_ DOCK_SWITCHThis IOCTL sets a position of the dock switch. The dock switch may be set to either “modem” or “serial” positions.lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of either DOCK_MODEM or DOCK_SERIAL asdefined in OEMIOCTL.H; the value specifies the position the switch is to be set. The call appears as follows:// port = DOCK_MODEM or DOCK_SERIAL as defined in oemioctl.hBOOL SetDockSwitch( BYTE port){DWORD cmd = ITC_DOCK_SWITCH;DWORD cbRet;return KernelIoControl(IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM,&cmd, sizeof(cmd),&port,sizeof(port),&cbRet)}ITC_ WAKEUP_MASKThis IOCTL sets a bit mask that represents the mask for the five programmable wakeup keys. The I/O key is not aprogrammable wakeup key. By default it is always the system resume key and all other keys are set to disable keywakeup. A zero in a bit position masks the wakeup for that key. A one in a bit position enables wakeup for that key.lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of a wakeup mask consisting of the OR’ed constants asdefinedinOEMIOCTL.H.Onlythefollowingkeysareprogrammableaswakeupevents.#define SCANNER_TRIGGER 1#define SCANNER_LEFT 2#define SCANNER_RIGHT 4#define GOLD_A1 8#define GOLD_A2 0x10ITC_AMBIENT_KEYBOARD (does not apply to the 730 Computer)This IOCTL sets the threshold for the keypad ambient sensor. This can be a value from 0 (always off) to 255 (alwayson). lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of the desired setting.ITC_AMBIENT_FRONTLIGHT (does not apply to the 730 Computer)This IOCTL sets the threshold for the frontlight ambient sensor. This can be a value from 0 (always off) to 255.lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of the desired setting.$

Programming—Chapter 7249700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEIDThis IOCTL returns the device ID. There are two types of device IDssupported,whicharedifferentiatedbasedonthesizeoftheoutput buffer.TheUUIDisreturnedifthebuffersizeissettosizeof(UNIQUE_DEVICEID),otherwisetheoldstyledeviceIDisre-turned.Usage#include “pkfuncs.h”#include “deviceid.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Should be set to NULL. STRICT_ID settings are not supported.lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.lpOutBuf Must point to a UNIQUE_DEVICEID structure as defined byDEVICEID.H if the UUID is to be returnednOutBufSize The size of the UNIQUE_DEVICEID in bytes if the UUID is tobe returned. A DEVICE_ID as defined by PKFUNCS.H is re-turned if the size in bytes is greater than or equal to sizeof(DE-VICE_ID).lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function.Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.

$ProgrammingChapter —7250 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFOReturns the HAL version information of the Pocket PC image.Usage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Should be set to NULL.lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.lpOutBuf Must point to a VERSIONINFO structure as defined byOEMIOCTL.H. The fields should have these values:Scboemverinfo sizeof (tagOemVerInfo);Sverinfover 1Ssig; “ITC\0”Sid; ‘N’Stgtcustomer “”Stgtplat SeaRayStgtplatversion Current build version numberStgtcputype[8]; “Intel\0”Stgtcpu “PXA255\0”;Stgtcoreversion “”Sdate Build timeStime Build datenOutBufSize ThesizeofVERSIONINFOinbytes.lpBytesReturned Returns sizeof(PVERSIONINFO).Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.$

$Programming—Chapter 7251700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFOReturns the HAL version information of the Pocket PC image.Usage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO,LPVOIDlpInBuf, DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Should be set to NULL.nInBufSize Should be set to zero.lpOutBuf Must point to a VERSIONINFO structure as defined byOEMIOCTL.H. The fields should have these values:Scboemverinfo Sizeof (tagOemVerInfo);Sverinfover 1Ssig; “ITC\0”Sid; ‘B’Stgtcustomer “”Stgtplat SeaRayStgtplatversion Current build version number of thebootstrap loaderStgtcputype[8]; “Intel\0”;Stgtcpu “PXA255\0”Stgtcoreversion “”Sdate Build timeStime Build datenOutBufSize ThesizeofVERSIONINFOinbytes.lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned to lpOutBuf.Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.$

ProgrammingChapter —7252 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOTCauses the system to perform a warm-boot. The object store is retained.Usage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Should be set to NULL.lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.lpOutBuf Should be NULL.nOutBufSize Should be zero.Return ValuesNone.IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOTCauses the system to perform a cold-boot. The object store is cleared.Usage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Should be set to NULL.lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.lpOutBuf Should be NULL.nOutBufSize Should be zero.Return ValuesNone.

$Programming—Chapter 7253700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFOThis IOCTL code allows software to check the type of the most recentreset.Usage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Should be set to NULL.lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.lpOutBuf Must point to a HAL_RESET_INFO structure. See sample below.nOutBufSize ThesizeofHAL_RESET_INFOinbytes.lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function.Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.Sampletypedef struct {DWORD ResetReason; // most recent reset typeDWORD ObjectStoreState; // state of object store} HAL_RESET_INFO, * PHAL_RESET_INFO;// Reset reason types#define HAL_RESET_TYPE_UNKNOWN 0#define HAL_RESET_REASON_HARDWARE 1 // cold#define HAL_RESET_REASON_SOFTWARE 2 // suspend#define HAL_RESET_REASON_WATCHDOG 4#define HAL_RESET_BATT_FAULT 8 // power fail#define HAL_RESET_VDD_FAULT 16 // warm boot// Object store state flags#define HAL_OBJECT_STORE_STATE_UNKNOWN 0#define HAL_OBJECT_STORE_STATE_CLEAR 1$

ProgrammingChapter —7254 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICEThis IOCTL code allows software to check which device CE booted from.Usage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Should be set to NULL.lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.lpOutBuf Must point to a buffer large enough to hold a DWORD (4 bytes)that contains the boot device. The following boot devices are sup-ported:#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_UNKNOWN 0#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_ROM_XIP 1#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_ROM 2#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_PCMCIA_ATA 3#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_PCMCIA_LINEAR 4#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_IDE_ATA 5#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_IDE_ATAPI 6nOutBufSize ThesizeoflpOutBuf in bytes (4).lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function.Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.

Programming—Chapter 7255700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_HAL_REBOOTCauses the system to perform a warm-boot. The object store is retained.Usage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Should be set to NULL.lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.lpOutBuf Should be NULL.nOutBufSize Should be zero.Return ValuesNone.

$ProgrammingChapter —7256 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATIONReturns processor information.Usage#include “pkfuncs.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Should be set to NULL.nInBufSize Should be set to zero.lpOutBuf Should be a pointer to the PROCESSOR_INFO structure. ThePROCESSOR_INFO structure stores information that describesthe CPU more descriptively.typedef __PROCESSOR_INFO {WORD wVersion; // Set to value 1WCHAR szProcessorCore[40]; // “ARM\0”WORD wCoreRevision; // 4WCHAR szProcessorName[40]; // “PXA255\0”WORD wProcessorRevision; // 0WCAHR szCatalogNumber[100]; // 0WCHAR szVendor[100]; // “Intel Corporation\0”DWORD dwInstructionSet; // 0DWORD dwClockSpeed; // 400}nOutBufSize Should be set to sizeof(PROCESSOR_INFO) in bytes.lpBytesReturned Returns sizeof(PROCESSOR_INFO);Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.$

Programming—Chapter 7257700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_GET_CPU_IDReturns Xscale processor ID.Usage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORDlpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf ShouldpointtoaCPUIdInfostructuredefinedinOEMIOCTL.H.lpInBufSize Should be sizeof(CPUIdInfo).lpOutBuf Should be NULL.nOutBufSize Should be set to 0.lpBytesReturned Returns sizeof(PROCESSOR_INFO);Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.

$ProgrammingChapter —7258 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNetwork Selection APIsThe Network Selection APIs change the network adapter configurationprogrammatically. Both drivers support the same IOCTL function num-bers for loading and unloading the drivers.Loading and unloading of the 802.11b or 802.11b/g driver is performedby the FWL1: device in the system by performing DeviceIOControl() callsto the driver.Loading and unloading of the driver for the built-in Ethernet adapter isperformed by the SYI1: device in the system by performingDeviceIOControl() calls to the driver.SFor loading an NDIS driver associated with an adapter, the IOCTL isIOCTL_LOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT.SFor unloading NDIS drivers associated with an adapter the IOCTL isIOCTL_UNLOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT.Example#include <winioctl.h>#include “sysio.h”void DoLoad(int nDevice) {LPTSTR devs[] = { _T(“SYI1:”), _T(“FWL1:”) };HANDLE hLoaderDev;DWORD bytesReturned;hLoaderDev = CreateFile(devs[nDevice], GENERIC_READ|GENERIC_WRITE, 0,NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, 0, NULL);if (hLoaderDev != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) {if (!DeviceIoControl( hLoaderDev, IOCTL_LOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT, NULL, -1, NULL, 0,&bytesReturned, NULL)){MessageBox(NULL, TEXT(“SYSIO IoControl Failed”), TEXT(“Networkloader”),MB_ICONHAND);if (hLoaderDev!=INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);hLoaderDev = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE; // bad handle}else {CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);}}}void DoUnload(int nDevice) {LPTSTR devs[] = { _T(“SYI1:”), _T(“FWL1:”) };HANDLE hLoaderDev;DWORD bytesReturned;hLoaderDev = CreateFile(devs[nDevice], GENERIC_READ|GENERIC_WRITE, 0,NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, 0, NULL);if (hLoaderDev != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) {if (!DeviceIoControl( hLoaderDev, IOCTL_UNLOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT, NULL, -1, NULL, 0,&bytesReturned, NULL)){MessageBox(NULL, TEXT(“SYSIO IoControl Failed”),TEXT(“Networkloader”),MB_ICONHAND);if (hLoaderDev!=INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);hLoaderDev = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE; // bad handle}else {CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);}}}$

ProgrammingChapter —7260 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualBasic Connect/Disconnect FunctionsBelow are functions available for the 700 Color Computer when enabledwith the 802.11b or 802.11b/g radio module.RadioConnect()Connects to the available radio. Use this function if you plan on using alot of API calls that talk directly to the radio. Note that the 802.11b or802.11b/g radio must be enabled via NDISTRAY before you can connectto it.Syntax UINT RadioConnect( );Parameters None.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, otherwiseERR_CONNECT_FAILEDRemarks Call this function before you call any other function found withinthis API. It hunts out and connects to the 802.11b or 802.11b/gradio available on the system. Check extended error codes if it re-turns anything else for information.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_RadioConnect)();#elseUINT RadioConnect();#endifRadioDisconnect()Call this function when done using the 802.11 API to clean up aconnection from a previous RadioConnect() call. If you do not call thisfunction, you may leave memory allocated.Syntax UINT RadioDisconnect( );Parameters None.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, otherwiseERR_CONNECT_FAILED.Remarks None.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_RadioDisconnect)();#elseUINT RadioDisconnect();#endif

Programming—Chapter 7261700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualRadioDisassociate()Call this function to have the 802.11b or 802.11b/g radio disassociatefrom the current service set. The radio then enters an “off” mode until it iswoken again by setting the Service Set Identifier (SSID). Also, the NDISdriver generates an NDIS media disconnect event.Syntax UINT RadioDisassociate( );Parameters None.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, otherwiseERR_CONNECT_FAILED.Remarks None.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_RadioDisassociate)();#elseUINT RadioDisassociate();#endifQuery Information FunctionsGetAssociationStatus()Call this function to obtain the radio’s current association status with aservice set.Syntax UINT GetAssociationStatus( ULONG &);Parameters NDIS_RADIO_ASSOCIATED Indicates the radio is associated with an access pointNDIS_RADIO_SCANNING Indicates the radio is looking for an access point with whichto associateReturn Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks Data is only valid if the function returns ERROR_SUCCESS. Also, if ERROR_SUCCESS is re-turned, your ULONG reference is populated by one of the parameters listed above.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_GetAssociationStatus)(ULONG &);#elseUINT GetAssociationStatus(ULONG &);#endif

ProgrammingChapter —7262 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGetAuthenticationMode()Call this function to obtain the radio’s current authentication mode.Syntax UINT GetAuthenticationMode( ULONG &);Parameters NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_OPEN 802.11 Open Authentication. Indicates thatthe radio is using an open system.NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_SHARED 802.11 Shared Authentication. Indicates thatthe radio is using a shared key.NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_AUTO Auto switch between Open/Shared. Indicatesautomatic detection is used when available.NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_ERROR Defined as error value. Indicates the authen-tication mode was not determined at thistime or is unknown.NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA WPA AuthenticationNDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA_PSK WPA Preshared Key AuthenticationNDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA_NONE WPA NoneReturn Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks Data is only valid if ERROR_SUCCESS is returned. Also, if ERROR_SUCCESS is returned,your USHORT reference is populated with one of the parameters listed above.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_GetAuthenticationMode)(ULONG &);#elseUINT GetAuthenticationMode(ULONG &);#endifGetBSSID()Call this function to get the current MAC address (BSSID) of the serviceset. In ESS mode, this is the MAC address of the access point the radio isassociated with. In IBSS mode, this is a randomly generated MAC address,andservesastheIDfortheIBSS.Syntax UINT GetBSSID( TCHAR * );Parameters Pointer to a character array, which is populated with the current BSSID after a successful call.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your TCHAR array is populated with the BSSID of the cur-rent service set: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xxDefinitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_GetBSSID)(TCHAR *);#elseUINT GetBSSID(TCHAR *);#endif

Programming—Chapter 7263700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGetDiversity()Call this function to get the current diversity setting of your 802.11b or802.11b/g radio. This uses an optional NDIS5.1 OID to query the radio,of which a large number of 802.11b or 802.11b/g devices do not support.This may be inaccurate.Syntax UINT GetDiversity(USHORT *);Parameters ANT_PRIMARY The primary antenna is selected.ANT_SECONDARY The secondary antenna is selected.ANT_DIVERSITY The radio is in diversity mode, and uses both antennasReturn Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your USHORT reference is populated with one of the parame-ters listed above.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_GetDiversity)(USHORT *);#elseUINT GetDiversity(USHORT *);#endifGetLinkSpeed()Call this function to get the current link speed of the 802.11b or802.11b/g radio.Syntax UINT GetLinkSpeed( int &);Parameters This function accepts an int reference, and your int is populated with the current link speed, inMbps, rounded to the nearest whole integer, for example: 1, 2, 5, 11, etc.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks Data returned is valid if ERROR_SUCCESS is returned.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_GetLinkSpeed)(int &);#elseUINT GetLinkSpeed(int &);#endif

ProgrammingChapter —7264 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGetMac()Call this function to get the MAC address of the 802.11b or 802.11b/gradio.Syntax UINT GetMac( TCHAR * );Parameters Pointer to a character array, which is populated with the MAC address after a successful call.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your TCHAR array is populated with the formatted MACaddress of the adapter, as follows: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xxDefinitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_GetMac)(TCHAR *);#elseUINT GetMac(TCHAR *);#endifNote: Be sure to call RadioConnect() before calling this function for thisfunction to work properly.GetNetworkMode()Call this function to get the current Network Mode (SSID) for the802.11b or 802.11b/g radio.Syntax UINT GetNetworkMode( ULONG &);Parameters NDIS_NET_MODE_IBSS 802.11 Ad-Hoc Mode.NDIS_NET_MODE_ESS 802.11 Infrastructure Mode.NDIS_NET_MODE_UNKNOWN Anything Else/Unknown ErrorNDIS_NET_AUTO_UNKNOWN Automatic Selection. Use of this option is not supported orrecommended.NDIS_NET_TYPE_OFDM_5G 5Gigahertz54MbpsNDIS_NET_TYPE_OFDM_2_4G 802.11 2.4 GigahertzReturn Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated with one of the parame-ters listed above.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_GetNetworkMode)(ULONG &);#elseUINT GetNetworkMode(ULONG &);#endif

Programming—Chapter 7265700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGetNetworkType()Call this function to get the current network type of the radio. Do notconfuse this with GetNetworkMode().Syntax UINT GetNetworkType( ULONG &);Parameters NDIS_NET_TYPE_FH Indicatesthisisafrequencyhoppingradio.NDIS_NET_TYPE_DS Indicatesthatthisisadirectsequenceradio.NDIS_NET_TYPE_UNDEFINED Indicates this radio type is unknown or undefined.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated with one of the parame-ters listed above.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_GetNetworkType)(ULONG &);#elseUINT GetNetworkType(ULONG &);#endifGetSSID()Call this function to get the desired SSID of the 802.11b or 802.11b/gradio.Syntax UINT GetSSID( TCHAR * );Parameters Pointer to a character array, which is populated with the current SSID when successful.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your TCHAR array is populated with the desired SSID.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_GetSSID)(TCHAR *);#elseUINT GetSSID(TCHAR *);#endifNote: Call RadioConnect() before this function for this function to workproperly.

ProgrammingChapter —7266 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGetPowerMode()Call this function to get the current power savings mode of the radio.Syntax UINT GetPowerMode( ULONG &);Parameters NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_CAM Continuous Access Mode (ie: always on).NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_PSP Power Saving Mode.NDIS_RADIO_POWER_UNKNOWN Unknown power mode.NDIS_RADIO_POWER_AUTO Auto. (Available for 730 Mobile Computers)NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_FAST_PSP Fast PSP, good savings, fastReturn Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated with one of the parame-ters listed above.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_GetPowerMode)(ULONG &);#elseUINT GetPowerMode(ULONG &);#endifNote: Do not use Automatic Switching mode at this time.GetRSSI()Call this function to get the current RSSI (Radio Signal Strength Indica-tor), in Dbm.Syntax UINT GetRSSI( ULONG & );Parameters References a ULONG that is populated with the current RSSI after a successful call.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference contains the RSSI. Valid RSSI rangeis from –100 Dbm to –30 Dbm.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_GetRSSI)(ULONG &);#elseUINT GetRSSI(ULONG &);#endif

Programming—Chapter 7267700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGetTXPower()Call this function to get the current transmit power of the radio.Syntax UINT GetTXPower( ULONG &);Parameters NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_63 63 mWNDIS_POWER_LEVEL_30 30 mWNDIS_POWER_LEVEL_15 15 mWNDIS_POWER_LEVEL_5 5mWNDIS_POWER_LEVEL_1 1mWNDIS_POWER_LEVEL_UNKNOWN Unknown Value or Error.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated with the TX power inmilliwatts (mW). Valid ranges are from 5 mW to 100 mW.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_GetTXPower)(ULONG &);#elseUINT GetTXPower(ULONG &);#endif

ProgrammingChapter —7268 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGetWepStatus()Call this function to get the current state of the radio’s WEP and encryp-tion levels.Syntax UINT GetWepStatus( ULONG &);Parameters NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_ENABLED WEP is enabled; TKIP and AES are not enabled,and a transmit key may or may not be available.(same as NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ENABLED)NDIS_ENCRYPTION_DISABLED Indicates that AES, TKIP, and WEP aredisabled, and a transmit key is available. (Same asNDIS_RADIO_WEP_DISABLED)NDIS_ENCRYPTION_NOT_SUPPORTED Indicates encryption (WEP, TKIP, AES) is notsupported. (Same asNDIS_RADIO_WEP_NOT_SUPPORTED)NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_KEY_ABSENT Indicates that AES, TKIP, and WEP aredisabled, and a transmit key is not available.(Same as NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ABSENT)NDIS_ENCRYPTION_2_ENABLED IndicatesthatTKIPandWEPareenabled;AESis not enabled, and a transmit key is available.NDIS_ENCRYPTION_2_KEY_ABSENT Indicates that there are no transmit keys availablefor use by TKIP or WEP, TKIP and WEP areenabled; and AES is not enabled.NDIS_ENCRYPTION_3_ENABLED Indicates that AES, TKIP, and WEP are enabled,and a transmit key is available.NDIS_ENCRYPTION_3_KEY_ABSENT Indicates that there are no transmit keys availableforusebyAES,TKIP,orWEP,andAES,TKIP,and WEP are enabled.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated with one of theparameters listed above.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_GetWepStatus)(ULONG &);#elseUINT GetWepStatus(ULONG &);#endif

$Programming—Chapter 7269700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGetRadioIpAddress()Call this function to obtain a formatted string indicating whether DHCPis enabled, and what is the current adapters IP address.Syntax UINT GetRadioIpAddress( TCHAR *);Parameters Pointer to a character array that contains the formatted string of the IP address and static/DHCPinformation.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your TCHAR array contains a string formatted as follows:IP: DHCP Enabled\nxxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\n orIP: DHCP Disabled\nxxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\nDefinitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_GetRadioIpAddress)(TCHAR *);#elseUINT GetRadioIpAddress(TCHAR *);#endifGetCCXStatus()Call this function to get information about the current CCX status of theadapter.Syntax UINT GetCCXStatus( ULONG &);Parameters NDIS_NETWORK_EAP_MODE_OFF Disable EAP mode.NDIS_NETWORK_EAP_MODE_ON Enable EAP mode.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated with one of parameterslisted above.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_GetCCXStatus)(ULONG &);#elseUINT GetCCXStatus(ULONG &);#endif$

ProgrammingChapter —7270 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSet Information FunctionsAddWep()Call this function to add a WEP key to the radio. Call this function multi-pletimeswhenaddingmorethanoneWEPkey.Savethe“default”keyforlast. For example, when adding four keys, and the second key is the defaulttransmit key, add keys 1, 3 and 4 before you add key 2.Note: Addthedefaulttransmitkeylast.Syntax UINT AddWep( ULONG, BOOL, TCHAR * );Parameters ULONG Specifies the key index to be set. Valid values are 0–3.BOOL When set to TRUE, specifies that this key is the default transmit key.TCHAR Pointer to a character array that specifies the key data in either HEX (length of10 or 26) or ASCII (length of 5 or 13). This string must be null-terminated.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks When adding WEP keys to the radio, turn off encryption before you add the keys, then turn en-cryption back on afterwards. Also, be sure to add the TRANSMIT KEY last.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_AddWep)(ULONG, BOOL, TCHAR *);#elseUINT AddWep(ULONG, BOOL, TCHAR *);#endifEnableWep()Enables or disables WEP encryption on the radio (TRUE/FALSE).Syntax UINT EnableWep( BOOL );Parameters Set BOOL to TRUE to enable WEP encryption, or FALSE to disable WEP encryption.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks Call this function with TRUE as the parameter to enable WEP encryption. Call this function withthe FALSE parameter to disable WEP encryption. This call is an alias for EncryptionStatus(). Seethe following:EnableWEP(TRUE) = EncryptionStatus(NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_ENABLED)EnableWEP(FALSE) = EncryptionStatus(NDIS_ENCRYPTION_DISABLED)Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_EnableWep)(BOOL);#elseUINT EnableWep(BOOL);#endif

Programming—Chapter 7271700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualEncryptionStatus()Call this function to set the desired encryption status.Syntax UINT EncryptionStatus( UINT mode );Parameters NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_ENABLED WEP is enabled; TKIP and AES are notenabled, and a transmit key may or may not beavailable. (same asNDIS_RADIO_WEP_ENABLED)NDIS_ENCRYPTION_DISABLED Indicates that AES, TKIP, and WEP aredisabled, and a transmit key is available. (Sameas NDIS_RADIO_WEP_DISABLED)NDIS_ENCRYPTION_NOT_SUPPORTED Indicates that encryption (WEP, TKIP, andAES) is not supported. (Same asNDIS_RADIO_WEP_NOT_SUPPORTED)NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_KEY_ABSENT Indicates that AES, TKIP, and WEP aredisabled, and a transmit key is not available.(Same as NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ABSENT)NDIS_ENCRYPTION_2_ENABLED IndicatesthatTKIPandWEPareenabled;AESis not enabled, and a transmit key is available.NDIS_ENCRYPTION_2_KEY_ABSENT Indicates that there are no transmit keysavailable for use by TKIP or WEP, TKIP andWEP are enabled; and AES is not enabled.NDIS_ENCRYPTION_3_ENABLED Indicates that AES, TKIP, and WEP areenabled, and a transmit key is available.NDIS_ENCRYPTION_3_KEY_ABSENT Indicates that there are no transmit keysavailable for use by AES, TKIP, or WEP, andAES, TKIP, and WEP are enabled.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks None.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_EncryptionStatus)(UINT mode);#elseUINT EncryptionStatus(UINT mode);#endif

ProgrammingChapter —7272 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSetAuthenticationMode()Call this function to set the desired authentication mode.Syntax UINT SetAuthenticationMode( ULONG );Parameters NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_OPEN 802.11 Open Authentication. Indicates thatthe radio is using an open system.NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_SHARED 802.11 Shared Authentication. Indicates thatthe radio is using a shared key.NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_AUTO Auto switch between Open/Shared. Indicatesautomatic detection is used when available.NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_ERROR Defined as error value. Indicates the authenti-cation mode was not determined at this timeor is unknown.NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA WPA AuthenticationNDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA_PSK WPA Preshared Key AuthenticationNDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA_NONE WPA NoneReturn Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks None.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_SetAuthenticationMode)(ULONG);#elseUINT SetAuthenticationMode(ULONG);#endifSetChannel()This function is currently not implemented. Ad-hoc networks automatical-ly select a channel or use the already existing channel.Syntax UINT SetChannel( USHORT );Parameters USHORT value that should populate with the desired channel (1–14).Return Values None.Remarks None.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_SetChannel)(USHORT);#elseUINT SetChannel(USHORT);#endif

Programming—Chapter 7273700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSetNetworkMode()Call this function to set the desired Network Mode.Syntax UINT SetNetworkMode( ULONG );Parameters NDIS_NET_MODE_IBSS 802.11 Ad-Hoc Mode.NDIS_NET_MODE_ESS 802.11 Infrastructure Mode.NDIS_NET_MODE_UNKNOWN Anything Else/Unknown ErrorNDIS_NET_AUTO_UNKNOWN Automatic Selection. Use of this option is not supported orrecommended.NDIS_NET_TYPE_OFDM_5G 5Gigahertz54MbpsNDIS_NET_TYPE_OFDM_2_4G 802.11 2.4 GigahertzReturn Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks None.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_SetNetworkMode)(ULONG);#elseUINT SetNetworkMode(ULONG);#endifSetPowerMode()Call this function to set the desired power mode.Syntax UINT SetPowerMode( ULONG mode );Parameters NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_CAM Continuous Access Mode (ie: always on).NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_PSP Power Saving Mode.NDIS_RADIO_POWER_UNKNOWN Unknown power mode.NDIS_RADIO_POWER_AUTO Auto. (Available for 730 Computers)NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_FAST_PSP Fast PSP, good savings, fastReturn Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks None.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_SetPowerMode)(ULONG mode);#elseUINT SetPowerMode(ULONG mode);#endif

ProgrammingChapter —7274 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSetSSID()Call this function with a pointer to a null-terminated TCHAR array con-taining the desired SSID to set the desired SSID of the adapter.Syntax UINT SetSSID( TCHAR * );Parameters Pointer to a character array that contains the desired SSID. This should be null-terminated.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks If an “ANY” network is desired, pass in _T(“ANY”).Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_SetSSID)(TCHAR *);#elseUINT SetSSID(TCHAR *);#endifSetCCXStatus()Call this function to set the desired CCX / Network EAP status.Syntax UINT SetCCXStatus( ULONG );Parameters NDIS_NETWORK_EAP_MODE_OFF Disable Network EAP / CCXNDIS_NETWORK_EAP_MODE_ON Enable Network EAP / CCXReturn Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks None.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_SetCCXStatus)(ULONG);#elseUINT SetCCXStatus(ULONG);#endifSetMixedCellMode()Call this function to set the desired mixed cell mode.Syntax UINT SetMixedCellMode( ULONG );Parameters NDIS_MIXED_CELL_OFF Disable Mixed CellNDIS_MIXED_CELL_ON Enable Mixed CellReturn Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.Remarks None.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_SetMixedCellMode)(ULONG);#elseUINT SetMixedCellMode(ULONG);#endif

ProgrammingChapter —7276 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualEnableZeroConfig()This enables or disables the Wireless Zero Configuration Wizard fromMicrosoft. After calling this function, a warm-boot is required for thechange to take effect.Note: Enabling this function effectively disables all the SET commands inthis API.Syntax UINT EnableZeroConfig( USHORT );Parameters TRUE Enable Wireless Zero ConfigFALSE Disable Wireless Zero ConfigReturn Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_ZERO_CONFIG_CHANGE_FAILED when thequery failed.Remarks Call this function to set the desired Zero Config status.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_EnableZeroConfig)(USHORT);#elseUINT EnableZeroConfig(USHORT);#endifisZeroConfigEnabled()Call this function to determine whether Zero Config is currently enabled.Syntax UINT isZeroConfigEnabled( );Parameters None.Return Values TRUE if ZeroConfig is enabled, and FALSE if it is disabled.Remarks None.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_isZeroConfigEnabled)();#elseUINT isZeroConfigEnabled();#endifisOrinoco()Call this function to determine whether the current radio is anORiNOCO, Lucent, or WaveLAN radio.Syntax UINT isOrinoco( );Parameters None.Return Values TRUE if this is an ORiNOCO radio, and FALSE if it is not.Remarks None.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_isOrinoco)();#elseUINT isOrinoco();#endif

Programming—Chapter 7277700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualisSupplicantRunning()Call this function to determine whether the security supplicant is running.Syntax UINT isSupplicantRunning( );Parameters None.Return Values TRUE if the security supplicant is running, FALSE if it is not running.Remarks None.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_isSupplicantRunning)();#elseUINT isSupplicantRunning();#endifStartScanList()If a scan list is configured on the system, this causes the API to begin theprocess of scanning for an available network. This call can take quite awhile to process (depending upon the length of the scan list and how long ittakestofindavalidnetwork), you may wish to call it from a separatethread.Syntax UINT StartScanList( );Parameters None.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful.Remarks Call this function to start the scan list functionality of the system.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_StartScanList)();#elseUINT StartScanList();#endifStartSupplicant()Call this function to start the supplicant service if it is installed on the sys-tem.Syntax UINT StartSupplicant( );Parameters None.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful.Remarks None.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_StartSupplicant)();#elseUINT StartSupplicant();#endif

ProgrammingChapter —7278 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualStopSupplicant()Call this function to stop the supplicant service.Syntax UINT StopSupplicant( );Parameters None.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful.Remarks None.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_StopSupplicant)();#elseUINT StopSupplicant();#endifisDHCPEnabled()Call this function to determine whether DHCP is enabled on the currentadapter.Syntax UINT isDHCPEnabled( );Parameters None.Return Values TRUE if DHCP is enabled, FALSE if it is not.Remarks None.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_isDHCPEnabled)();#elseUINT isDHCPEnabled();#endifRenewDHCP()Call this function to force a DHCP renewal on the current network adap-ter.Syntax UINT RenewDHCP( );Parameters None.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful.Remarks You should not have to call this function on Microsoft PocketPC 2003 or Microsoft Windows CE4.2 .NET and later devices.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_RenewDHCP)();#elseUINT RenewDHCP();#endif

Programming—Chapter 7279700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGetCurrentDriverName()Call this function to populate the TCHAR array with the driver name.Syntax UINT GetCurrentDriverName( TCHAR *);Parameters Pointer to a TCHAR array which contains the name of the driver when successful.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful.Remarks This function is called with a pointer to a TCHAR array that is large enough to hold the name ofthe driver PLUS the null terminator.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_GetCurrentDriverName)(TCHAR *);#elseUINT GetCurrentDriverName(TCHAR *);#endifResetRadioToSystemSave()Call this function to force the radio to reset to the last desired active pro-file.Syntax UINT ResetRadioToSystemSave( );Parameters None.Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful.Remarks None.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_ResetRadioToSystemSave)();#elseUINT ResetRadioToSystemSave();#endifEnableSuppLogging()Call this function to set the desired supplicant logging mode.Syntax UINT EnableSuppLogging( ULONG );Parameters NDIS_SUPP_LOGGING_ON Supplicant Logging EnabledNDIS_SUPP_LOGGING_OFF Supplicant Logging DisabledReturn Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful.Remarks None.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_EnableSuppLogging)(ULONG);#elseUINT EnableSuppLogging(ULONG);#endif

ProgrammingChapter —7280 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSwitchPacketDriver()Call this function to switch between available packet drivers on the system.Syntax UINT SwitchPacketDriver( USHORT );Parameters INTERMEC_PACKET_DRIVER Intermec Packet Driver (ZNICZIO)NDISUIO_PACKET_DRIVER Microsoft Packet Driver (NDISUIO)Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful.Remarks After switching to a new packet driver, perform a warm boot for changes to take effect.Definitions #ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADINGtypedef UINT (*PFN_SwitchPacketDriver)(USHORT);#elseUINT SwitchPacketDriver(USHORT);#endifDeprecated FunctionsThe following functions are deprecated. While these are not removed fromthe API, these are no longer supported. Their parameters are no longerapplicable and the return value for all of these functions is:ERR_FUNCTION_DEPRECATEDFunction SyntaxGetRTSThreshold(Deprecated) UINT GetRTSThreshold( USHORT &);GetMedia(Deprecated) UINT GetMedia( ULONG &);GetMedium(Deprecated) UINT GetMedium( ULONG &);GetNicStats(Deprecated) UINT GetNicStats( NDIS_802_11_STATISTICS &);SetRTSThreshold(Deprecated) UINT SetRTSThreshold( USHORT &);SetTXRate(Deprecated) UINT SetTXRate( UCHAR );EncryptWepKeyForRegistry(Deprecated) UINT EncryptWepKeyForRegistry( TCHAR * szDest,TCHAR * szSource );SetDiversity(Deprecicated) UINT SetDiversity( USHORT );

Programming—Chapter 7281700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNotificationsUse the following information to programmatically control the vibrator, towrite an application to turn on the vibrator when a message is received viathe WLAN radio link, and turn it off when the user hits a key.Vibrator support is implemented in the NLED driver as a false LED. Thevibrator is LED 5 and is identified with an CycleAdjust of –1. The vibrateoption is only available in the notifications panel when the vibrator is pres-ent in the system.Regarding an applications interface to NLED.DLL, LEDs must be avail-able for use by applications. This is possible via two functions exported bythe COREDLL.DLL file. To use the LED functions, declare these as ex-tern ”C” as follows:extern ”C” BOOL WINAPI NLEDGetDeviceInfo(UINT nInfoId,void *pOutput);extern ”C” BOOL WINAPI NLEDSetDevice( UINT nDeviceId, void*pInput);The LEDs are enumerated for access through the data structures associatedwith these APIs:SNotification LED 0SRadio On LED 1 (does not apply to the 730 Computer)SAlpha Lock LED 2SScanner LED 3SLow Battery 4SVibrator 5 (does not apply to the 730 Computer)

ProgrammingChapter —7282 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNLEDGetDeviceInfoUsage#include “nled.h”SyntaxBOOL NLEDGetDeviceInfo ( UINT nInfoId, void *pOutput );ParametersnInfoId Integer specifying the information to return. These values are defined:NLED_COUNT_INFO Indicates the pOutput buffer specifies the number of LEDs onthe device.NLED_SUPPORTS_INFO_ID Indicates the pOutput buffer specifies information about thecapabilities supported by the LED.NLED_SETTINGS_INFO_ID Indicates the pOutput buffer contains information about theLED current settings.pOutput Pointer to the buffer to which the information is returned. The buffer points to various structuretypes defined in “nled.h”, depending on the value of nId, as detailed in the following table:Value of nID Structure in pOutputLED_COUNT_INFO NLED_COUNT_INFONLED_SUPPORTS_INFO NLED_SUPPORTS_INFONLED_SETTINGS_INFO NLED_SETTINGS_INFONLEDSetDeviceUsage#include “nled.h”SyntaxBOOL NLEDSetDevice ( UINT nDeviceId, void *pInput );ParametersnDeviceId Integer specifying the device identification. The following is defined:NLED_SETTINGS_INFO_ID Contains information about the desired LED settings.pInput Pointer to the buffer that contains the NLED_SETTINGS_INFO structure.

Programming—Chapter 7283700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualReboot FunctionsThere are several methods, via Kernel I/O Control functions, that an ap-plication program can use to force the 700 Color Computer to reboot.IOCTL_HAL_REBOOTIOCTL_HAL_REBOOT performs a warm-boot. See page 255.IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOTInvoking the KernelIOControl function withIOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT forces a cold reboot. This resets the 700Color Computer and reloads Windows CE as if a power-up wasperformed. The contents of the Windows CE RAM-based object store arediscarded. See page 252.IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOTThis function is supported on 700 Color Computers. It performs a warmboot of the system, preserving the object store. See page 252.

ProgrammingChapter —7284 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualRemapping the KeypadNote: Use caution when remapping the keypad. Improper remapping mayrender the keypad unusable. Data within the 700 Color Computer couldalso be lost, should any problems occur.Applications have the ability to remap keys on the 700 Color NumericKeypad and 700 Color Alphanumeric Keypad. This will allow applicationsto enable keys that would otherwise not be available, such as the [F1]function key. Also, to disable keys that should not be available, such as thealpha key because no alpha entry is required. Care should be exercisedwhen attempting to remap the keypad because improper remapping maycause the keypad to become unusable. This can be corrected by cold boot-ing the device which will cause the default keymap to be loaded again.Note that remapping the keys in this way affects the key mapping for theentire system, not just for the application that does the remapping.There are three “planes” supported for the 700 Color Numeric Keypadand Alphanumeric Keypad. Keys that are to be used in more than one shiftplane must be described in each plane.Unshifted PlaneThe unshifted plane contains values from the keypad when not pressedwith other keys, such as the following:Press the KeysNumeric Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad To Enter This1M15T59Y9Gold PlaneThe gold plane contains values from the keypad when a key is simulta-neously pressed with the [Gold] bkey on the numeric keypad or the[Gold/White]ckey on the alphanumeric keypad, such as the following:Press the KeysNumeric Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad To Enter This[Gold] b1[Gold/White]ceSend[Gold] b5[Gold/White]cCA3[Gold] b9[Gold/White]cPPgDn

$Programming—Chapter 7285700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAlpha (Blue) PlaneThe alpha plane contains values from the keypad when the keypad hasbeenplacedinalphamodebypressingthebluealphakey,suchasthefol-lowing:Press the KeysNumeric Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad To Enter This[Alpha] F1[Alpha]dgCaps[Alpha] F5[Alpha]dJj[Alpha] F9[Alpha]dWwKey ValuesKey values for each plane are stored in the registry. All units ship with adefault key mapping already loaded in the registry. Applications that wishto change the default mapping need to read the appropriate key from theregistry into an array of Words, modify the values required and then writethe updated values back into the registry. The registry access can be donewith standard Microsoft API calls, such as RegOpenKeyEx(),RegQueryValueEx(), and RegSetValueEx().Numeric KeypadFor the 700 Color Numeric Keypad, the following registry keys containthe plane mappings:STheunshiftedplanemappingcanbefoundintheregistryat:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\VkeySThe gold plane mapping can be found in the registry at:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\VkeyGoldSThealphaplanemappingcanbefoundintheregistryat:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\VkeyAlphaAlphanumeric KeypadFor the 700 Color Alphanumeric Keypad, the following registry keys con-tain the plane mappings:STheunshiftedplanemappingcanbefoundintheregistryat:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\ALPHA\VkeySThe gold plane mapping can be found in the registry at:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\ALPHA\VkeyGoldSThealphaplanemappingcanbefoundintheregistryat:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\ALPHA\VkeyAlpha$

ProgrammingChapter —7286 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualHow Key Values Are Stored in RegistryTo know which fields to update in the registry, you must know what ScanCodes are assigned to each physical key (see the “Keypad Scan Codes andMeanings” tableonthenextpage).TheScanCodeisusedatthelowestlevel of the system to let the keypad driver know which physical key hasbeen pressed. The keypad driver takes that scan code and looks it up in atable (a copy of the one stored in the registry) to determine which valuesto pass on to the operating system.Each registry key is just an array that describes to the keypad driver whatvalue needs to be passed for each physical key. The key values are indexedby the scan code, this is a zero-based index. For example in the unshiftedplane, the [4] key has a scan code of 0x06. This means that the seventhword under the “Vkey” registry key will have the value for the [4] key.Taking a sample of the “Vkey” registry key shows the following values:00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,34,00,00,00,. . .Thevalueis34,00.Thevaluesareinreversebyteorderbecausethatistheway the processor handles data. When writing an application, nothingneeds to be done to swap the bytes, as this will happen automatically whenthe data is read into a byte value. This is something you just need to beaware of when looking at the registry. Knowing this, we can see that thevalue that the keypad driver will pass to the system is a hex 34. Lookingthat up on an UNICODE character chart, we see that it maps to a “4”. Ifyou wanted the key, labeled “4”, to output the letter “A” instead, youwould need to change the seventh word to “41” (the hexadecimal repre-sentation of “A” from the UNICODE chart), then put the key back intothe registry.Note: Do not remap scan codes 0x01, 0x41, 0x42, 0x43, 0x44. Remap-pingthesescancodescouldrenderyour700ColorComputerunusableuntil a cold-boot is performed.If you wish to disable a certain key, remap its scan code to 0x00.Change NotificationJust changing the registry keys will not immediately change the keymappings. To notify the keypad driver that the registry has been updated,signal the “ITC_KEYBOARD_CHANGE” named event using theCreateEvent() API.Advanced Keypad RemappingIt is also possible to map multiple key presses to one button and to mapnamed system events to a button. The multiple key press option could beuseful to cut down on the number of keys needed to press in a given situa-tion or to remap which key behaves like the action key. Mapping events toa button could be useful to change which buttons will fire the scanner,control volume, and allow for suspending and resuming the device. If youneed help performing one of these advanced topics please contact IntermecTechnical Support.

Programming—Chapter 7287700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualScan CodesAt the lowest driver level, the 700 Color Numeric Keypad and the 700ColorAlphanumericKeypadidentifieskeysasscancodes.Thesescancodes are sent via the keypad microcontroller, and cannot be changedwithout modifying the keypad firmware.Numeric KeypadThe following scan codes pertain to the 700 Color Numeric keypad:Numeric Keypad Scan Codes and MeaningsPressthisKey Meaning ScanCodeReserved 0x00II/O button 0x01Scanner Handle Trigger 0x02Scanner Left 0x03Scanner Right 0x0444/GHI/A2 0x06None 0x07LLeft arrow/Back Tab 0x08None 0x09KBkSp// (forward slash) 0x0Ab[Gold] key 0x0BNone 0x0CEEsc/– (minus sign) 0x0DDDown arrow/Volume decrease 0x0E11/Caps/Send 0x0F77/PQRS/PgUp 0x10F[Alpha] key 0x11None 0x12UUp arrow/Volume increase 0x13RRight arrow/Tab 0x1422/ABC/End 0x1588/TUV/* (asterisk) 0x1600/Win 0x1755/JKL/A3 0x18None 0x19AAction/+ (plus symbol) 0x1A33/DEF/backlight 0x1B99/WXYZ/PgDn 0x1C

ProgrammingChapter —7288 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNumeric Keypad Scan Codes and Meanings (continued)ScanCodeMeaningPressthisKeyeEnter/@ (at symbol) 0x1D66/MNO/A4 0x1ENone 0x1F–0x40BCharge Detect 0x41CLCD frontlight 0x42bAmbient light 0x42Threshold crossed 0x42Headset detected 0x43Keypad Backlight 0x44bAmbient Light 0x44Threshold Crossed 0x44Alphanumeric KeypadThe following scan codes pertain to the 700 Color Alphanumeric keypad:Alphanumeric Keypad Scan Codes and MeaningsPressthisKey Meaning ScanCodeReserved 0x00iI/O button 0x01Scanner Handle Trigger 0x02Scanner Left 0x03Scanner Right 0x04AA/A1 key 0x05BB/A2 key 0x06eEscape/Send 0x07jLeft arrow/Back Tab 0x08kUp arrow/Volume increase 0x09mDown arrow/Volume decrease 0x0AlRight arrow/Tab 0x0BaAction/End 0x0CEE/Win 0x0DFF/= (equal sign) 0x0EGG/* (asterisk) 0x0FCC/A3 0x10HH// (forward slash) 0x11DD/A4 0x12

Programming—Chapter 7289700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAlphanumeric Keypad Scan Codes and Meanings (continued)ScanCodeMeaningPressthisKeyJJ/PgUp 0x13KK/@ (as symbol) 0x14LL/– (minus sign) 0x15MM/1 0x16NN/2 0x17II/backlight 0x18PP/PgDn 0x19QQ/, (comma) 0x1ARR/+ (plus sign) 0x1BSS/4 0x1CTT/5 0x1DOO/3 0x1EgCaps/Lock 0x1FhBkSp 0x20VV/. (period) 0x21WW/7 0x22XX/8 0x23UU/6 0x24cGold/White 0x25NumLock 0x26bSpace 0x27ZZ/0 0x28fEnter 0x29YY/9 0x2ANone 0x2B–0x40BCharge Detect 0x41CLCD frontlight 0x42bAmbient light 0x42Threshold crossed 0x42Headset detected 0x43Keypad Backlight 0x44bAmbient Light 0x44Threshold Crossed 0x44

$ProgrammingChapter —7290 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSample View of Registry KeysThe following is a sample view of the current default key mapping for the700 Color Numeric Keypad. See the registry on your device for the latestkey mappings.[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD]”ResumeMask”=dword:7”Vkey”=hex: 00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,34,00,00,00,\25,00,00,00,08,00,03,02,00,00,1B,00,28,00,31,00,\37,00,01,02,00,00,26,00,27,00,32,00,38,00,30,00,\35,00,00,00,01,03,33,00,39,00,0D,00,36,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,07,05,01,05,03,05,02,05”VkeyGold”=hex: 00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,34,00,00,00,\09,01,00,00,BF,00,03,02,00,00,BD,00,75,00,72,00,\21,00,01,02,00,00,76,00,09,00,73,00,38,01,5B,00,\35,00,00,00,BB,01,09,05,22,00,32,01,36,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,07,05,01,05,03,05,02,05”VkeyAlpha”=hex: 00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,47,00,00,00,\25,00,00,00,08,00,03,02,00,00,1B,00,28,00,02,02,\50,00,01,02,00,00,26,00,27,00,41,00,54,00,20,00,\4A,00,00,00,01,03,44,00,57,00,0D,00,4D,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,07,05,01,05,03,05,02,05$

291700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualConfigurable SettingsAThis appendix contains information about the Data Collection, IntermecSettings, SNMP, Unit Information, Utilities, and Wireless Network con-trol panel applets that may be on the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer.Note: “700 Color” pertains to 740, 741, 750, 751, 760, and 761 Com-puters unless otherwise noted.SNMP, Intermec Settings, and Data Collection settings that can appearunder Settings are dependent on what hardware configuration is done foreach 700 Color Computer at the time of shipment. These settings current-lyonlyappearifascanneroranimageroptionispresent.Likewise, other control panel applets that are specifically related to the802.11b or 802.11b/g radio module will appear when a 802.11b or802.11b/g radio module is installed in a 700 Color Computer. Controlpanel applets that are specific for Wireless Printing, CDMA/1xRTT, andGSM/GPRS radio modules will only appear when each respective hard-ware configuration is done on the 700 Color Computer. See Chapter 4,“Network Support,” for more information about the radio modules or the wire-less printing.Information about using reader commands and configuration bar codes toconfiguresomeofyoursettingsisalsointhisappendix.Note: Information about the settings you can configure with the IntermecSettings control panel applet is described in the Intermec Computer Com-mand Reference Manual (P/N: 073529). The online manual is availablefrom the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A292 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualConfiguration ParametersA configuration parameter changes the way the 700 Color Computer op-erates, such as configuring a parameter to have the 700 Color Computeremit a very loud beep in a noisy environment. Use any of the followingmethods to execute configuration parameters:SChange Data Collection and SNMP parameters via control panel ap-plets later in this appendix.SSend parameters from an SNMP management station. See “SNMP Con-figuration on the 700 Color Computer” starting on page 187.SScan EasySet bar codes. You can use the EasySet bar code creation soft-ware from Intermec Technologies Corporation to print configurationlabels. Scan the labels to change the scanner configuration and datatransfer settings.Use the Intermec EasySet software to print configuration labels you canscan to change your configuration settings. For more information, seethe EasySet online help. EasySet is available from the Intermec DataCapture web site.Changing a Parameter SettingMenus of available parameters for each group are listed. Use the scroll barsto go through the list. Expand each menu (+) to view its parameter set-tings. Tap a parameter to select, or expand a parameter (+) to view its sub-parameters.Note that each parameter or subparameter is shown with its default settingor current setting in (< >) brackets. Tap a parameter or subparameter toselect that parameter, then do any of the following to change its setting:Tap Apply to apply any changes. Note that these illustrations are from aSymbologies parameter.STypinganewvalueinanentryfield.SChoosing a new value from the drop-down list.SSelecting a different option. The selected option contains a bullet.STap Defaults,thenApply to restore factory-default settings. Tap Yeswhen you are prompted to verify this action.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A293700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSTap Refresh to discard changes and start again. Tap Yes when you areprompted to verify this action.About Configuration ParametersYou can find this information about each configuration parameter:SName and Purpose:Describes the parameter and its function.SAction:Describes what to do with a parameter once that parameter is selected.SSNMP OID:Lists the SNMP OID for the parameter.SSyntax or Options:Syntax lists the two-character code for the parameter, if the parameter isconfigurable by scanning a bar code or by sending parameters through anetwork. Both Syntax and Options list acceptable values for the para-meter.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A294 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualData Collection Control Panel AppletNote: This applet is not available in units with PSM Build 3.00 or newer.To determine your PSM Build version, tap Start >Programs >File Explorer >thePSMinfo text file.If your unit has PSM Build 3.00 or newer, then you may have the IntermecSettings control panel applet in place of the Data Collection applet.Information about the settings you can configure with the IntermecSettings applet is described in the Intermec Computer Command ReferenceManual. The online manual is available from the Intermec web site atwww.intermec.com.See “Scanner Control and Data Transfer”intheIntermec Windows CE/Pocket PC Software Developer’s Kit (SDK) User’s Manual shipped with theSoftware Developer’s Kit (SDK) for information about data collectionfunctions. Note that icons are shown to the left.To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings>theSystem tab > Data Collection to access its control panel applet.Use the left and right arrows to scroll through the tabs along the bottom ofthe control panel applet, then tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs rep-resent the following groups of settings or parameters:SSymbologies (starting on page 295)SSymbology Options (starting on page 316)SBeeper/LED (starting on page 324)SImager (starting on page 330)SVirtual Wedge (starting on page 335)

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A295700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSymbologiesYou can change bar code symbology parameter settings in your 700 ColorComputer via the Data Collection control panel applet. The followingparameters are for bar code symbologies. Additional information about themore common bar code symbologies are in Appendix B, “Bar Codes.” Notethat these parameters are listed in the order of their appearance within this tab.Most of these symbologies apply to both the imager and the laser scannertools. However, when using an imager, the Macro PDF (page 306),MicroPDF417 (page 308),Matrix2of5(page 310), Telepen (page 311),andCode 11 (page 312) symbologies are not supported. Likewise, when usinga laser scanner, the QR Code (page 313), Data Matrix (page 314),andMaxiCode (page 315) symbologies are not supported.Note: The 730 Computer uses the EV10 APS linear imager which sup-ports 1D symbologies.The following table shows which bar code symbologies are supported byan imager, a laser scanner, or the EV10 APS Linear ImagerBar Code Symbology Imager Laser ScannerEV10 APSLinear ImagerCode 39 XXXInterleaved 2 of 5 XXXStandard 2 of 5 XXXMatrix 2 of 5 X XCode 128 XXXCode 93 XXXCodabar XXXMSI X XPlessey XXUPC XXXEAN/EAN 128 XXXCode 11 X XPDF417 XXXMicro PDF417 X XTelepen XXData Matrix XQR Code XMaxiCode X

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A296 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 39Code 39 is a discrete, self-checking, variable length symbology. The char-acter set is uppercase A–Z, 0–9, dollar sign ($), period (.), slash (/), per-cent (%), space ( ), plus (+), and minus (-).ActionTap (+) to expand the Code 39 parameter, select the setting to bechanged, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option fromthe drop-down list.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.3.1OptionsDecoding 01Not activeActive (default)Format 01Standard 43 characters (default)Full ASCIIStart/Stop 01Not transmitted (default)TransmittedStart/Stop characters(Not supported when us-ing an imager)012$(dollarsign)only* (asterisk) only (default)$ and * (dollar sign and asterisk)Check digit 0123456Not used (default)Mod 43 transmittedMod 43 not transmittedFrench CIP transmittedFrench CIP not transmittedItalian CPI transmittedItalian CPI not transmittedBar code length 01Any length (default)Minimum lengthMinimum length 001–254 Minimum length 1–254 (default is 6)Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A297700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualStandard 2 of 5Standard 2 of 5 is a discrete and self-checking symbology that uses the barsto encode information and the spaces to separate the individual bars.ActionTap (+) to expand the Standard 2 of 5 parameter, select the setting to bechanged, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option fromthe drop-down list.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.4.1OptionsDecoding 01Not active (default)ActiveFormat 01Identicon, 6 start/stop bars (default)Computer Identics, 4 start/stop barsCheck digit 012Not used (default)Mod 10 transmittedMod 10 not transmittedBar code length 012Any lengthMinimum length (default)Fixed lengthsMinimum length 001–254 Minimum length 1–254 (default is 6)Fixed length 1 000–254 Fixed bar code length 0–254 (default is 0)Fixed length 2 000–254 Fixed bar code length 0–254 (default is 0)Fixed length 3 000–254 Fixed bar code length 0–254 (default is 0)Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered. If Barcode length =“2”thenFixed length 1,Fixed length 2,orFixed length 3is entered.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A298 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCodabarCodabar is a self-checking, discrete symbology.ActionTap (+) to expand the Codabar parameter, select a setting to be changed,then select an option from the drop-down list to change this setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.5.1OptionsDecoding 01Not active (default)ActiveStart/Stop 01234Not transmitted (default)abcd transmittedABCD transmittedabcd/tn*e transmittedDC1–DC4 transmittedCLSI library system(Not supported when us-ing an imager)01Not active (default)ActiveCheck digit 012Not used (default)TransmittedNot transmittedBar code length 012Any lengthMinimum length (default)Fixed lengthsMinimum length 003–254 Minimum length 3–254 (default is 6)Fixed length 1 000–254 Fixed bar code length 0–254 (default is 0)Fixed length 2 000–254 Fixed bar code length 0–254 (default is 0)Fixed length 3 000–254 Fixed bar code length 0–254 (default is 0)Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered. If Barcode length =“2”thenFixed length 1,Fixed length 2,orFixed length 3is entered.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A299700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUPC/EANUPC/EAN are fixed-length, numeric, continuous symbologies that usefour element widths.ActionTap (+) to expand the UPC/EAN parameter, select the setting to bechanged, then select an option to change this setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.6.1OptionsUPC A 01Not ActiveActive (default)UPC E 01Not ActiveActive (default)EAN 8 01Not ActiveActive (default)EAN 13 01Not ActiveActive (default)Add-on digits 01Not required (default)RequiredAdd-on 2 digits 01Not active (default)ActiveAdd-on 5 digits(Not supported when us-ing an imager)01Not active (default)ActiveUPC A check digit 01Not transmittedTransmitted (default)UPC E check digit 01Not transmittedTransmitted (default)EAN 8 check digit 01Not transmittedTransmitted (default)EAN 13 check digit 01Not transmittedTransmitted (default)UPC A number system 01Not transmittedTransmitted (default)UPC E number system 01Not transmittedTransmitted (default)UPC A re-encoding 01UPC A transmitted as UPC AUPC A transmitted as EAN 13 (default)UPC E re-encoding 01UPC E transmitted as UPC E (default)UPC E transmitted as UPC AEAN 8 re-encoding 01EAN 8 transmitted as EAN 8 (default)EAN 8 transmitted as EAN 13

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A300 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 93Code 93 is a variable length, continuous symbology that uses four elementwidths.ActionTap the Code 93 parameter, then select an option to change this parame-ter setting. Tap (+) to access the Code 93 Lengths parameter.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.7.1Options0 Not active (default)1ActiveCode 93 LengthSets the Code 93 bar code length.ActionTap (+) to expand the Code 93 parameter, then tap (+) to expand theCode 93 Lengths parameter. Tap the setting to be changed, then tap anoption to change this setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.19.1OptionsBar code length 01Any lengthMinimum length (default)Minimum length 001–254 Minimum length 1–254 (default is 6)Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A301700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 128Code 128 is a variable-length, continuous, high-density, alphanumericsymbology that uses multiple element widths and supports the extendedASCII character set.ActionTap the Code 128 parameter, then select an option to change this parame-ter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.9.1Options0 Not active (default)1ActiveThis illustration is from a 700 Color Computer using a laser scanner.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A302 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 128 OptionsSet the following for the Code 128 parameter. Note that the EAN 128 ]C1and CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical options are not available when you usean imager with your 700 Color Computer.ActionTap (+) to expand the Code 128 Options parameter, select a setting, thenselect an option to change this setting.SNMP OIDNone.OptionsEAN 128 ]C1 Identifier(Not supported when using animager)01Remove (default)IncludeCIP 128 French Pharmaceutical(Not supported when using animager)01Not active (default)ActiveBar code length 01Any length (default)Minimum lengthMinimum length 001–254 Minimum length 1–254 (default is 6)This illustration is from a 700 Color Computer using a laser scanner.

$Configurable SettingsAppendix —A303700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 128 FNC1 CharacterThe Code 128 FNC1 character (EAN 128 norms) can be any ASCII char-acter and is used as a separator when multiple identifiers and their fieldsare concatenated. Note that this is not available when you use an imager withyour 700 Color Computer.Non-printable ASCII characters can be entered using the following syntaxwhere HH is the hexadecimal value of the character.\xHHFor example, the GS character, whose hexadecimal value is 1D, would beentered as \x1D. In addition,the following characters have their ownidentifiers:SBEL \aSBS \bSFF \fSLF \nSCR \rSHT \tSVT \vActionTap (+) to expand the Code 128 parameter, then type the ASCII charac-ters to be set for the Code 128 FNC1 character parameter.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.21.1OptionsAny ASCII character (default is the GS function character — ID hex)$

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A304 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPlesseyPlessey is a pulse-width modulated symbology like most other bar codes. Itincludes a start character, data characters, an eight-bit cyclic check digit,and a termination bar. The code is continuous and not self-checking. Youneed to configure two parameters for Plessey code: Start Code and CheckDigit. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700Color Computer.ActionTap (+) to expand the Plessey parameter, select the setting to be changed,then select an option to change this setting or select an option from thedrop-down list.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.10.1OptionsDecoding 01Not active (default)ActiveCheck digit 01Not transmitted (default)TransmittedBar code length 01Any lengthMinimum length (default)Minimum length 001–254 Minimum length 1–254 (default is 6)Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A305700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMSIMSI is a symbology similar to Plessey code (page 304) that includes a startpattern, data characters, one or two check digits, and a stop pattern. Notethat this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Com-puter.ActionTap (+) to expand the MSI parameter, select the setting to be changed,then select an option to change this setting or select an option from thedrop-down list.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.15.1OptionsDecoding 01Not active (default)ActiveCheck digit 0123Mod 10 transmitted (default)Mod 10 not transmittedDouble Mod 10 transmittedDouble Mod 10 not transmittedBar code length 01Any lengthMinimum length (default)Minimum length 001–254 Minimum length 1–254 (default is 6)Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A306 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPDF417PDF417 is a stacked two-dimensional symbology that provides the abilityto scan across rows of code. Each row consists of start/stop characters, rowidentifiers, and symbol characters, which consist of four bars and fourspaces each and contain the actual data. This symbology uses error correc-tion symbol characters appended at the end to recover loss of data.Because the virtual wedge translates incoming data into keypad input, thesize of the keypad buffer limits the effective length of the label to 128characters. Longer labels may be truncated. For PDF417 labels of morethan 128 characters, you can develop an application that bypasses the key-pad buffer.ActionTap the PDF417 parameter, then select an option to change this parame-ter setting. Tap (+) to access either the Macro PDF options parameter orthe Micro PDF417 parameter.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.17.1Options0Notactive1Active(default)This illustration is from a 700 Color Computer using a laser scanner.Macro PDF optionsMacro PDF is used when a long message requires more than one PDF417label. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700Color Computer.SSelect Buffered to store a multi-label PDF417 message in the Sabrebuffer, thus transmitting the entire message when all labels are read.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A307700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSSelect Unbuffered for multi-label PDF417 messages that are too longfor the Sabre buffer (memory overflow). Each part of the PDF417 labelis transmitted separately, and the host application must then assemblethe message using the macro PDF control header transmitted with eachlabel. Control Header is only present in macro PDF codes and is alwaystransmitted with unbuffered option.ActionTap (+) to expand the PDF417 parameter, tap (+) to expand the MacroPDF parameter, select a setting to be changed, then select an option tochange this setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.22.1OptionsMacro PDF 01UnbufferedBuffered (default)Control header 01Not transmitted (default)TransmittedFile name 01Not transmitted (default)TransmittedSegment count 01Not transmitted (default)TransmittedTime stamp 01Not transmitted (default)TransmittedSender 01Not transmitted (default)TransmittedAddressee 01Not transmitted (default)TransmittedFile size 01Not transmitted (default)TransmittedChecksum 01Not transmitted (default)Transmitted

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A308 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMicro PDF417Micro PDF417 is a multi-row symbology derived from and closely basedon PDF417 (page 306). A limited set of symbology sizes is available, to-gether with a fixed level of error correction for each symbology size. Notethat this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Com-puter.ActionTap (+) to expand the PDF417 parameter, tap (+) to expand the MicroPDF417 parameter, select a setting to be changed, then select an option tochange this setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.27.1OptionsDecoding 01Not active (default)ActiveCode 128 Emulation 01Not active (default)Active

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A309700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualInterleaved 2 of 5Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) is a high-density, self-checking, continuous,numeric symbology used mainly in inventory distribution and the automo-bile industry.Note: An Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code label must be at least three characterslong for the 700 Color Computer to scan and decode correctly.ActionTap (+) to expand the Interleaved 2 of 5 parameter, select the setting to bechanged, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option fromthe drop-down list.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.23.1OptionsDecoding 01Not active (default)ActiveCheck digit 01234Not used (default)Mod 10 transmittedMod 10 not transmittedFrench CIP transmittedFrench CIP not transmittedBar code length 012Any lengthMinimum length (default)Fixed lengthsMinimum length 003–254 Minimum length 3–254 (default is 6)Fixed length 1 003–254 Fixed bar code length 3–254 (default is 3)Fixed length 2 003–254 Fixed bar code length 3–254 (default is 3)Fixed length 3 003–254 Fixed bar code length 3–254 (default is 3)Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered. If Barcode length =“2” then Fixed length 1,Fixed length 2,orFixed length 3 isentered.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A310 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMatrix 2 of 5Matrix 2 of 5 is a numerical symbology. Note that this is not available whenyou use an imager with your 700 Color Computer.ActionTap (+) to expand the Matrix 2 of 5 parameter, select the setting to bechanged, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option fromthe drop-down list.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.24.1OptionsDecoding 01Not active (default)ActiveBar code length 01Any lengthMinimum length (default)Minimum length 001–254 Minimum length 1–254 (default is 6)Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A311700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTelepenTelepen is an alphanumeric, case-sensitive, full ASCII symbology. Notethat this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Com-puter.ActionTap (+) to expand the Telepen parameter, select the setting to be changed,then tap an option to change this setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.25.1OptionsDecoding 01Not active (default)ActiveFormat 01ASCII (default)Numeric

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A312 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 11Code 11 is a high density, discrete numeric symbology that is extensivelyused in labeling telecommunications components and equipment. Notethat this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Com-puter.ActionTap (+) to expand the Code 11 parameter, select the setting to bechanged, then tap an option to change this setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.26.1OptionsDecoding 01Not active (default)ActiveCheck digit verification 121 digit (default)2 digitsCheck digit transmit 01DisableEnable (default)

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A313700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualQR CodeQR Code (Quick Response Code) is a two-dimensional matrix symbologycontaining dark and light square data modules. It has position detectionpatterns on three of its four corners and features direct encodation of theJapanese Kana-Kanji character set. It can encode up to 2509 numeric or1520 alphanumeric characters and offers three levels of error detection.Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Col-or Computer or if you are using a 730 Computer.ActionTap (+) to expand the QR Code parameter, select the setting to bechanged, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option fromthe drop-down list.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.35.1OptionsDecoding 01Not activeActive (default)

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A314 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualData MatrixA two-dimensional matrix symbology, which is made of square modulesarranged within a perimeter finder pattern. The symbology utilizes ErrorChecking and Correcting (ECC) algorithm with selectable levels for dataerror recovery and Cyclic Redundancy Check algorithm to validate thedata. The character set includes either 128 characters conforming to ISO646 (ANSI X3.4 - 1986) or 256 extended character set. Maximum capac-ity of a symbol is 2335 alphanumeric characters, 1556 8-bit byte charac-ters or 3116 numeric digits. Note that this is not available when you use alaserscannerwithyour700ColorComputerorifyouareusinga730Com-puter.ActionTap (+) to expand the Data Matrix parameter, select the setting to bechanged, then tap an option to change this setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.34.1OptionsDecoding 01Not activeActive (default)

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A315700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMaxiCodeMaxiCode is a fixed-size 2-D matrix symbology which is made up of offsetrows of hexagonal elements arranged around a unique circular finder pat-tern. ASCII data is encoded in six-bit symbol characters. The symbol con-tains 33 rows which are alternately 30 and 29 elements wide. There arefive different code sets. A single MaxiCode symbol can encode up to 93characters of data. Note that this is not available when you use a laser scannerwithyour700ColorComputerorifyouareusinga730Computer.ActionTap (+) to expand the MaxiCode parameter, select the setting to bechanged, then tap an option to change this setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.33.1OptionsDecoding 01Not activeActive (default)

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A316 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSymbology OptionsTo access the settings from the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings>theSystem tab>theData Collection icon to access its control panelapplet.Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Symbology Options tab, thentap this tab to access its parameters. The following are parameters for barcode symbology options. Note that these are listed in the order of theirappearance within the Symbology Options tab.Symbology IDIdentifies the bar code symbology in which data is encoded by prependinga user-specified symbology identifier to the data. You can prepend one ofthese types of character strings to identify the symbology:SUser-defined ASCII Character (Option 1):A user-defined symbology identifier is a single ASCII character. You canassign a custom identifier character to each bar code symbology. Notethat this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 ColorComputer.SAIM ISO/IEC Standard (Option 2 — Required to define symbology IDs):The AIM Standard has a three-character structure which indicates thesymbology and optional features. See the AIM ISO/IEC Standard forinformation.ActionSelect Symbology ID, then select an option to change this parameter set-ting. Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, then select any ofthe user ID parameters listed. See the top of the next page for a sample screenof the Code 39 user ID.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.22.1Options0 Disable (default)1 User defined (disabled when using an imager)2 ISO/IEC Standard

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A317700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 39 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Code 39 bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 39 userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.3.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*).Code 128 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Code 128 bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 128 userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.5.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*).Codabar User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Codabar bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Codabar userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.2.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is D.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A318 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 93 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Code 93 bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 93 userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.4.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*).Interleaved 2 of 5 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code data. Note that thisis not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Interleaved 2of 5 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parame-ter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.10.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is I (not lowercase L).PDF417 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify PDF417 bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the PDF417 userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.12.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is an asterisk (*).MSI User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify MSI bar code data. Note that this is not avail-able when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the MSI user IDparameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.11.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is D.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A319700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPlessey User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Plessey bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Plessey userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.13.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is D.Standard 2 of 5 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Standard 2 of 5 bar code data. Note that this isnot available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Standard 2 of5userIDparameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parametersetting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.23.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is D.UPC A User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify UPC-A (Universal Product Code) bar codedata. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700Color Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the UPC A userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.6.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is A.UPC E User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify UPC-E bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the UPC E userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.7.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is E.

$Configurable SettingsAppendix —A320 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualEAN 8 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify EAN-8 bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the EAN 8 userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.8.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is \xFF.EAN 13 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify EAN-13 (European Article Numbering) barcode data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your700 Color Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the EAN 13 userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.9.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is F.Matrix 2 of 5 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Matrix 2 of 5 bar code data. Note that this isnot available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Matrix 2 of 5user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parametersetting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.24.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is D.Telepen User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Telepen bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Telepen userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.25.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is an asterisk (*).$

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A321700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 11 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Code 11 bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 11 userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.16.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*).

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A322 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPrefixPrepends a string of up to 20 ASCII characters to all scanned data.ActionTap the Prefix parameter, then enter a prefix value to change this parame-ter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.29.1OptionsAcceptable values are up to 20 ASCII characters. Embedded null(<NUL >) characters are not allowed. Default is no characters (disabled).

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A323700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSuffixAppends a string of up to 20 ASCII characters to all scanned data.ActionTap the Suffix parameter, then enter a suffix value to change this parame-ter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.30.1OptionsAcceptable values are up to 20 ASCII characters. Embedded null(<NUL >) characters are not allowed. Default is no characters (disabled).

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A324 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualBeeper/LEDTo access the settings from the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings>theSystem tab>theData Collection icon to access its control panelapplet.Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Beeper/LED tab, then tap thistab to access its parameters.Most of these functions are not available when using an imager. The followingtable shows which functions are supported either by an imager or by alaser scanner.Beeper Function Imager Laser ScannerBeeper XBeeper Volume XBeeper Frequency XGood Read Beeps XGood Read Beep Duration XThe following are parameters for features on the 700 Color Computer.Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A325700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualBeeperSets the volume for the good read beep. Note that this is not available whenyouusealaserscannerwithyour700ColorComputer.ActionTap the Beeper parameter, then select an option to change this parametersetting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.6.1Options1 Beeper (default)4Vibrate(not supported on 730 Computers)700 Color with Imager Screen 730 Screen

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A326 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualBeeper VolumeSets the volume for the good read beep. Note that this is not available whenyou use an imager with your 700 Color Computer.ActionTap the Beeper volume parameter, then select an option to change thisparameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.6.1Options0Low1High(default)2Medium3Off4VibrateDisabling the VolumeTo disable the beeper, tap Start >Settings >thePersonal tab > Sounds &Notifications >theVolume tab, drag the System volume slider bar to theleft “Silent” position, then tap ok to exit this applet. See Chapter 1,“Introduction“ for more information.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A327700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualBeeper FrequencySets the frequency for the good read beep. Note that this is not availablewhen you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer.ActionTap the Beeper frequency parameter, then enter a frequency value tochange this parameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.7.1Options1000–4095 (default is 2090)

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A328 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGood Read BeepsSets the number of good read beeps. Note that this is not available when youuseanimagerwithyour700ColorComputer.ActionTap the Good read beeps parameter, then select an option to change thisparameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.8.1Options0 No beeps1 One beep (default)2 Two beeps

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A329700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGood Read Beep DurationSets the duration of the good read beep. Note that this is not available whenyou use an imager with your 700 Color Computer.ActionTap the Good read beep duration parameter, then enter a duration valueto change this parameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.9.1Options0–2550 Beep duration in milliseconds. (default is 80)

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A330 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualImagerNote: These instructions do not apply to the 730 Computer.To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings>theSystem tab > Data Collection to access its control panel applet.Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Imager tab, then tap this tabto access its parameters.The following are parameters for the imager. Note that these are listed inthe order of their appearance within the Imager tab.Aimer LED DurationThe Aimer LED Duration controls the time the Aimer LED is turned onwhen the scan button is pressed. After this time, images are captured fordecoding. The purpose is to position the Aimer LED on the bar code sym-bol before attempting to decode the bar code. Note that this is not availablewhenyouusealaserscannerwithyour700ColorComputer.ActionTap the Aimer LED Duration parameter, then enter a value to change thissetting. Note that values must be in 50 ms increments, such as 500, 650,or 32500. Values not entered in 50 ms increments are rounded down. Forexample, 2489 ms is rounded down to 2450 ms, 149 ms is rounded downto 100 ms, etc..SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.21.1Options0–65500 ms (Default is 0)

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A331700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSticky Aimer DurationThe Sticky Aimer Duration controls the time the Aimer LED stays on af-ter the a bar code read completes or after the trigger button is released.Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Col-or Computer.ActionTap the Sticky Aimer Duration parameter, then enter a value to changethis setting. Note that values must be in 50 ms increments, such as 500,650, or 32500. Values not entered in 50 ms increments are roundeddown. For example, 2489 ms is rounded down to 2450 ms, 149 ms isrounded down to 100 ms, etc..SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.24.1Options0–65535 ms (Default is 1000)

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A332 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualImage DimensionThe image dimensions control the vertical size of the image for decoding.This can restrict the image to one bar code when otherwise, there might bemore than one bar code in the image to be decoded. Note that this is notavailable when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Color Computer.ActionTap the Image dimension parameter, select the position to be changed,then tap an option or enter a value to change this position.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.22.1OptionsLeft position 0Not supportedRight position 0Not supportedTop position 0–478 Position in pixels (Default is 0)Bottom position 0–479 Position in pixels (Default is 479)

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A333700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualLighting ModeTheLightingModesetsthelightingmodeoftheimager.Whensetto“LED Priority,” the imager depends more on ambient lighting to illumi-nate the bar code for reading. When set to “Aperture Priority,” the imageruses its built-in LED to illuminate the bar code for reading. Note that thisis not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Color Computer.ActionTap the Lighting Mode parameter, then select an option to change thisparameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.23.1Options0LEDPriority(default)1 Aperture Priority

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A334 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual1D OmniDir Decode EnableThe 1D OmniDir Decode Enable affects the scanning abilities of theIT4000 Imager. With 1D omni directional enabled, the imager is able todecode images and bar code labels regardless of the orientation of the label.With 1D omni directional disabled, the imager only decodes labels in thedirection of the aimer LED. Note that this is not available when you use alaser scanner with your 700 Color Computer.ActionTap the 1D OmniDir Decode Enable parameter,then select an option tochange this parameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.25.1Options0Disabled1 Enabled (default)

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A335700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualVirtual WedgeTo access the settings from the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings>theSystem tab > Data Collection to access its control panel applet.Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Virtual Wedge tab, then tapthis tab to access its parameters.The following are parameters for the virtual wedge scanner. Note that theseare listed in the order of their appearance within the Virtual Wedge tab.Virtual WedgeEnables or disables the virtual wedge for the internal scanner. The virtualwedge retrieves scanned Automatic Data Collection (ADC) data and sendsit to the keypad driver so that the 700 Color Computer can receive andinterpret the data as keypad input.Because the virtual wedge translates incoming data into keypad input, thesize of the keypad buffer limits the effective length of the label to 128characters. Longer labels may be truncated. For labels of more than 128characters, you need to develop an application that bypasses the keypadbuffer.ActionTap the Virtual Wedge parameter, then tap an option to change this pa-rameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.2.1Options0Disable1Enable(default)

$Configurable SettingsAppendix —A336 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPreambleSets the preamble that precedes any data you scan with the 700 ColorComputer. Common preambles include a data location number or an op-erator number.ActionTap the Preamble parameter, then enter a preamble value to change thisparameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.3.1SyntaxADdatawhere data is any acceptable values up to 31 ASCII characters. Embeddednull (<NUL >) characters are not allowed. Below are the non-printingcharacters you can use for Virtual Wedge Preambles. Default is blank.\a Alert (bell)\b Backspace\f Form Feed\n New line/line feed\r Carriage return\t Horizontal tab\v Vertical tab\xnnnn nnnn is up to four HEX digits. Use leading zeros to fill out to four digits toensure proper conversion. For example, to prepend the character M toscanned data, set the Preamble to either 1) M, or 2) x004D, where 4D is theHEX equivalent for an uppercase M.$

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A337700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNote: When you enter the AD command without data, the preamble isdisabled. If you want to use quotation marks or the following combina-tions of characters as part of the appended data, separate those charactersfrom the AD command with quotes. If you do not use quotes as describedhere, the 700 Color Computer interprets the characters as another config-uration command:ADAEAFKCBVEXDFExampleTo use the two-character string BV as a preamble, scan this command (as aCode 39 label) or send this command through the network:$+AD“BV”

$Configurable SettingsAppendix —A338 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPostambleSets the postamble that is appended to any data you scan with the 700Color Computer. Common postambles include cursor controls, such astabs or carriage return line feeds.ActionTap the Postamble parameter, then enter a postamble value to change thisparameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.4.1SyntaxAEdatawhere data is any acceptable values up to 31 ASCII characters. Embeddednull (<NUL >) characters are not allowed. Below are the non-printingcharacters you can use for Virtual Wedge Postambles:\a Alert (bell)\b Backspace\f Form Feed\n New line/line feed\r Carriage return\t Horizontal tab (default)\v Vertical tab\xnnnn nnnn is up to four HEX digits. Use leading zeros to fill out to four digits toensure proper conversion. For example, to prepend the character M toscanned data, set the Preamble to either 1) M, or 2) x004D, where 4D is theHEX equivalent for an uppercase M.$

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A339700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNote: When you enter the AE command without data, the postamble isdisabled. If you want to use quotation marks or the following combina-tions of characters as part of the appended data, separate those charactersfrom the AE command with quotes. If you do not use quotes as describedhere, the 700 Color Computer interprets the characters as another config-uration command.ADAEAFKCBVEXDFExampleTo use the two-character string BV as a postamble, scan this command (asa Code 39 label) or send this command through the network:$+AE“BV”

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A340 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGridSets the virtual wedge grid, which filters the data coming from this 700Color Computer. The data server supports data filtering, which allows youto selectively send scanned data. The virtual wedge grid is similar to the“format” argument of the C Runtime Library scan function.ActionTap the Grid parameter, then enter a grid value to change this parametersetting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.5.1SyntaxAF<symID> filter-expression= > editing-expressionwhere:S<symID>The AIM symbology ID (optional).Sfilter-expressionAny character string that includes valid filter expression values. Go tothe SDK User’s Manual provided with your Windows CE/PocketPC SDKfor a list of valid filter expression values.Sediting-expressionAny character string that includes valid editing expression values. Go tothe SDK User’s Manual provided with your Windows CE/PocketPC SDKfor a list of valid editing expression values.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A341700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode PageSetsthevirtualwedgecodepage.Thecodepagecontrolsthetranslationfrom the character set of the raw collected data to Unicode, which is thecharacter set expected by Windows CE applications. The default code pageis 1252, which is the Windows Latin 1 (ANSI) character set.ActionTap the Code Page parameter, then select an option to change this param-eter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.6.1OptionsTheonlyacceptablevalueforthecodepageparameteris“1252,” which isthe default.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A342 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIntermec Settings Control Panel AppletYou may have the Intermec Settings control panel applet. Informationabout the settings you can configure with this applet is described in theIntermec Computer Command Reference Manual. The online manual isavailable from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com.See “Scanner Control and Data Transfer”intheIntermec Windows CE/Pocket PC Software Developer’s Kit (SDK) User’s Manual shipped with theSoftware Developer’s Kit (SDK) for information about data collectionfunctions.To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings>theSystem tab > Intermec Settings to access its control panel applet.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A343700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSNMP Control Panel AppletNote: This applet is not available in units with PSM Build 3.00 or newer.To determine your PSM build version, tap Start >Programs >File Explorer >thePSMinfo text file.If your unit has PSM Build 3.00 or newer, then you may have the IntermecSettings control panel applet in place of the SNMP applet. Informationabout the settings you can configure with the Intermec Settings applet isdescribed in the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual.Theonline manual is available from the Intermec web site atwww.intermec.com.Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) parameters include iden-tification information, security encryption, security community strings,and traps.To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings>theSystem tab > SNMP to access its control panel applet.Tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs represent three groups of settingsor parameters:SSecurity (starting on the next page)STraps (starting on page 349)SIdentification (starting on page 351)

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A344 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSecurityTo access the settings from the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings>theSystem tab > SNMP >theSecurity tab to access its parameters.The following are parameters that affect encryption and communitystrings. Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance within theSecurity tab.Read Only CommunitySets the read-only community string for this 700 Color Computer, whichis required for processing of SNMP get and get next requests.ActionTap the Read Only Community parameter, then enter a communitystring to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.2.0OptionsThe read-only community string can be up to 128 ASCII characters. De-fault is Public.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A345700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualRead/Write CommunitySets the read/write community string, which is required for processing ofSNMP set requests by this 700 Color Computer. An SNMP packet withthis name as the community string will also process SNMP get and nextrequests.ActionTap the Read/Write Community parameter, then enter a communitystring to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.3.0OptionsTheread/writecommunitystringcanbeupto128ASCIIcharacters.De-fault is Private.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A346 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualRead EncryptionSets the packet-level mode of security for SNMP read-only requests. If youenable read encryption, all received SNMP get and get next packets haveto be encrypted or the packet will not be authorized. If encryption is en-abled, you can only use software provided by Intermec Technologies.Note: To enable security encryption, you also need to set the Security En-cryption Key (page 348).ActionTap the Read Encryption parameter, then select an option to change thisparameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.4.0Options1On SNMPgetandgetnextpacketsmustbeencrypted2Off SNMP packets do not have to be encrypted (default)

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A347700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWrite EncryptionSets the packet-level mode of security for SNMP read/write requests. Ifyou enable write encryption, all SNMP packets that are received with theread/write community string have to be encrypted or the packet will notbe authorized. You need to use software from Intermec Technologies thatsupports encryption.Note: To enable security encryption, you also need to set the Security En-cryption Key (page 348).ActionTap the Write Encryption parameter, then select an option to change thisparameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.5.0Options1On SNMP packets must be encrypted2Off SNMP packets do not have to be encrypted (default)

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A348 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualEncryption KeyIdentifies the key that this 700 Color Computer uses to encrypt or deci-pher SNMP packets. Encryption is used only by software provided by In-termec Technologies. If encryption is enabled, SNMP management plat-forms will not be able to communicate with the 700 Color Computer.The encryption key is returned encrypted.ActionTap the Encryption Key parameter, then enter a security encryption keyvaluetochangethisparametersetting.Note: You also need to set either Read Encryption (page 346) or WriteEncryption (page 347) or both.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.6.0OptionsThe encryption key can be from 4 to 20 ASCII characters. Default isNULL.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A349700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTrapsTo access the settings from the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings>theSystem tab > SNMP >theTraps tab to access its parameters.The following are authentication and threshold parameters for traps. Notethat these are listed in the order of their appearance within the Traps tab.AuthenticationDetermines whether to send authentication traps. When trap authentica-tion is enabled, an authentication trap is sent if an SNMP packet is re-ceived by the master agent with an invalid community string.ActionTap the Authentication parameter, then select an option to change thisparameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.2.2.0Options1On(default)2Off

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A350 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualThresholdDetermines the maximum number of traps per second that the masteragent generates. If the threshold is reached, the trap will not be sent.ActionTap the Threshold parameter, then enter a threshold value to change thisparameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.2.3.0OptionsAny positive integer value. Default is 10.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A351700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIdentificationTo access the settings from the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings>theSystem tab > SNMP >theIdentification tab to access itsparameters.The following are parameters for contact, location, and name informationfor support purposes. Note that these are listed in the order of their appear-ance within the Identification tab.ContactSets the contact information for the person responsible for this 700 ColorComputer.ActionTap the Contact parameter, then enter the name of your contact represen-tative to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.2.1.1.4.0OptionsThe identification contact may be up to 255 ASCII characters. Default isno characters or blank.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A352 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNameSets the assigned name for this 700 Color Computer.ActionTap the Name parameter, then enter the name of your 700 Color Com-puter to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5.0OptionsThe identification name may be up to 255 ASCII characters. Default is nocharacters or blank.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A353700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualLocationSets the identification location for this 700 Color Computer, such as“Shipping.”ActionTap the Location parameter, then enter the location of where your 700Color Computer to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.2.1.1.6.0OptionsThe identification location may be up to 255 ASCII characters. Default isno characters or blank.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A354 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUnit Information Control Panel AppletNote: This applet is not available in units with PSM Build 3.00 or newer.To determine your PSM build version, tap Start >Programs >File Explorer >thePSMinfo text file.If your unit has PSM Build 3.00 or newer, then you may have the IntermecSettings control panel applet in place of the Unit Information applet.Information about the settings you can configure with the IntermecSettings applet is described in the Intermec Computer Command ReferenceManual. The online manual is available from the Intermec web site atwww.intermec.com.Unit Information is a read-only control panel applet that provides infor-mation about your 700 Color Computer, such as software version builds,available CAB files, and the internal battery status.To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings>theSystem tab > Unit Information to access its control panel applet.Tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs represent three groups of settingsor parameters:SVersions (next paragraph)SBattery Status (starting on page 355)SCAB Files (starting on page 356)VersionsYou can view the latest software build version on your 700 ColorComputer by accessing the Unit Information control panel applet.To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings>theSystem tab > Unit Information >theVersions tab to view the latestsoftware build version. Tap ok to exit this information.700 Color Screen 730 Screen

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A355700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualBattery StatusYou can view the battery status for your 700 Color Computer by accessingthe Unit Information control panel applet.To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings>theSystem tab > Unit Information >theBattery Status tab to view thecurrent status. Tap ok to exit this information.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A356 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCAB FilesYou can view the latest developer or released version of each CAB file fromIntermec Technologies Corporation that are installed in your 700 ColorComputer via the Unit Information control panel applet. Custom CABfiles are not displayed in this applet. See the Software Tools User’s Manual formore information about these files.To access the information from the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings >theSystem tab > Unit Information >theCAB Files tab to viewthecurrentCABfileversions.Tapok to exit this information.When a CAB file is built, a registry entry is created with a build numberfor that file. This CAB Files control panel applet looks for a registry keyfor each CAB file installed. When the registry entry is found, the CAB filename and version number information are displayed. If a CAB file has notbeen installed, then its information is not displayed.Below is a list of CAB files from Intermec Technologies that are availableforyour700ColorComputerwiththeirlatestdeveloperorreleasedver-sion of the software build. Should you need to add any of these to your700 Color Computer, contact an Intermec representative.SBtMainStack:Installation of the Main Bluetooth Stack is handled automatically as partof the operating system boot-up procedure. See Chapter 4, “NetworkSupport,” for more information about Bluetooth wireless printing.SComm Port Wedge:ThesoftwarebuildfortheCommPortWedge.Note that the Comm PortWedge CAB file is available on the Intermec Developer’s Library CD.SNPCPTest:This installs a Norand®Portable Communications Protocol (NPCP)Printing test application which will print to an Intermec®4815, 4820,or 6820 Printer. See Chapter 5, “Printer Support,” for more information.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A357700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSS9C Upgrade:Installs the files needed to upgrade the S9C scanner firmware. See the700 Color Management Tools portion of the Intermec Developer’s LibraryCD for more information about upgrading the firmware.SSDK:Installs the Intermec Software Developer’s Kit (SDK). See the SDKUser’s Manual for more information.SWinCfg:Configures the NRINET.INI file, launches the NRINet client, andloads and unloads the LAN and WLAN device drivers.SWireless Printing Sample:Installs a sample application that developers can use for reference whenthey are developing their own Wireless Printing applications. ThesourcecodeforthisapplicationisincludedaspartoftheWirelessPrint-ing SDK on the Intermec Developer’s Library CD.See the SDK User’sManual for more information.SActiveX Control Tools:This lists some of the CAB files that may be available with which toinstall ActiveX Control Tools. See the SDK Online Help for more infor-mation.SAXCommunication:Communication controls that transmit or receive messages from in-put connections.SAXFileTransfer:File transfer controls that transmit and receive files using the TrivialFile Transfer Protocol (TFTP).SAXReaderCommand:Reader command functions that modify and retrieve configurationinformation from your 700 Color Computer.SAXVWedge:The virtual wedge control that retrieves scanned ADC data and sendsit to the keyboard driver to interpret data as keyboard input.

Configurable SettingsAppendix —A358 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUtilities Control Panel AppletThe Utilities control panel applet examines and modifies settings and op-erational modes of specific hardware and software on the 700 Color Com-puter, including the dock switch, registry storage, wakeup mask, and ap-plication launch keys.To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings>theSystem tab > Utilities to access its control panel applet.Use the left and right arrows to scroll through the tabs along the bottom ofthe control panel applet, then tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs rep-resent the following groups of settings or parameters:SDock Switch (next paragraph)SRegistry Save (page 359)SWakeup Mask (page 360)SApp Launch (page 361)Dock SwitchFrom the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings >theSystem tab >Utilities >theDock Switch tab to access the Dock Switch control panelapplet.Use this applet to control the position of the dock switch. This can be seteither to a COM A (phone jack for a modem) position or to a COM B(serial) position.If switched to COM B and suspended, the terminal has the following be-havior:SIf the 700 Color Computer is on charge, the dock switch remainsswitched to COM B.SIf the 700 Color Computer is off charge, the dock switch switches toCOMAandremaininthispositionuntilthe700ColorComputerre-sumes charge.

$Configurable SettingsAppendix —A359700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualRegistry SaveFrom the 700 Color Computer, tap Start >Settings >theSystem tab >Utilities >theRegistry Save tab to access the Registry Save control panelapplet.For Windows Mobile 2003, the only medium available for saving the reg-istry is the Flash File System (PSM). Registry data is stored in the“\Flash_File_Store\Registry” path. Check Enable Registry Storage to en-able this function.To ensure that the 700 Color Computer restores the real-time clock after acold-boot, check the Enable RTC Restore option. Note that this does notapply to the 730 Computer.700 Color Screen 730 Screen$

Intermec Technologies 2610CF 2610CF User Manual legal

Intermec Technologies Corporation 2610CF legal

Contents

700C User Manual 1 of 3

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation